Skoda Yeti Owners Manual

SIMPLY CLEVER
KODA Yet i
OWNER'S MANUAL
Int roduct ion

You have opt ed for a KODA our sincere t hanks for your confidence in us.
Your new KODA offers you a vehicle feat uring t he most modern engineering and a wide range of equipment
which you will undoubt edly wish t o use t o t he full during your daily motoring. That is w hy, w e recommend
t hat you read t his Owner's Manual at t ent ively t o enable you t o become familiar wit h your car and all t hat it
offers as quickly as possible.
Please do not hesit at e t o cont act your specialist garage or import er should you have any furt her quest ions or
any problems regarding your vehicle which may arise. He will be ready at any t ime t o receive your quest ions,
suggest ions and crit icisms.
Nat ional legal provisions, which deviat e from t he informat ion cont ained in t hese operat ing inst ruct ions, t ake
precedence over t he informat ion cont ained in t he operat ing inst ruct ions.
We wish you much pleasure w it h your KODA and pleasant mot oring at all t imes.
Your KODA AUTO a.s. (hereinaft er KODA)
Int roduct ion
On-board lit erat ure

The on-board literat ure for your vehicle consist s of t his Ow ner's Manual as well as a Service schedule and a Help on t he road. There can
also be a variety of other addit ional operat ing manuals and inst ruct ions
on-board (e.g. an operat ing manual for t he radio) depending on t he vehicle model and equipment .
If one of t he publicat ions list ed above is missing, please cont act a specialist garage immediat ely, w here one will be glad to assist you in such
matt ers.
One should not e t hat t he det ails given in t he vehicle's t echnical document at ion alw ays t ake precedence over t hose in t he Ow ner's Manual.
Ow ner's Manual
This Owner's manual describes all possible equipment variant s wit hout
ident ifying t hem as special equipment , model variant s or market -dependent equipment .
Consequent ly, t his vehicle does not need t o cont ain all of t he equipment component s described in t his Ow ner's manual.
The scope of equipment for your vehicle is described in t he sales document at ion you w ere given when purchasing t he car. For more informat ion, cont act your local KODA ret ailer.
The illust rat ions can differ in minor det ails from your vehicle; t hey are
only int ended for general informat ion.
In addit ion t o information regarding all t he cont rols and equipment , t he
Owner's Manual also cont ains import ant informat ion regarding care and
operat ion for your safet y and also t o ret ain t he value of your vehicle. To
provide you wit h valuable t ips and aids. You will learn how you can operate your vehicle safely, economically and in an environment ally conscious w ay.
For safet y reasons, please also pay at t ent ion t o t he informat ion on accessories, modificat ions and replacement of part s page 207.
The ot her chapt ers of t he Owner's Manual are also important , however,
for proper t reat ment of your car - in addit ion t o regular care and maint enance - helps t o ret ain it s value and in many cases is also one of t he
conditions for possible warrant y claims.
The Service schedule
cont ains:
Vehicle dat a;
Service int ervals;
Overview of t he service work;
Service proof;
Confirmat ion of mobilit y w arrant y (only valid in cert ain count ries);
import ant informat ion on t he w arrant y.
The confirmations of the carried out service work are one of t he condit ions for possible warrant y claims.
Please alw ays present t he Service schedule w hen you t ake your car t o a
specialist garage.
If t he Service schedule is missing or w orn, please cont act t he specialist
garage where your car is serviced regularly. You will receive a duplicate,
in which t he previously carried out service w ork are confirmed.
Help on t he road
Cont ains t he most import ant t elephone numbers in individual count ries
as well as t he addresses and t elephone numbers of KODA importers.
Table of Cont ent s
Table of Cont ent s

Layout of t his Ow ner's Manual
(explanat ions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using t he syst em
Seat s and St ow age . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6
..........................
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
8
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inst rument s and w arning light s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General informat ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of t he inst rument clust er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine revolut ions count er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedomet er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant t emperat ure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Count er for dist ance driven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service reminder indicat or . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digit al clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shift recommendat ion for changing gears . . . . . . . . . . .
Mult i-funct ional indicat or (onboard comput er) . . . . . . .
MAXI DOT display (informat ion display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aut o Check Cont rol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning light s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locking and Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child safet y lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cent ral locking syst em . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remot e cont rol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synchonisat ion of t he remot e cont rol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ant i-t heft alarm syst em . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panoramic sliding roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Light s and Visibilit y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Light s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Int erior light ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Visibilit y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield wiper and wash syst em . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear-view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
10
10
10
11
11
11
11
12
12
13
14
14
18
19
22
31
31
32
33
37
38
38
39
42
45
45
52
53
54
58
Front seat s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjust ing front seat s elect rically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head rest raint s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Middle rear head rest raint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear seat s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
luggage compart ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Variable loading floor in t he luggage compart ment . .
Variable loading floor wit h spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Not e holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Asht ray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cigaret t e light er, power socket s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
St orage compart ment s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
St orage compart ment on t he front passenger side . .
Cooling of st orage compart ment on front passenger
side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
St orage compart ment on t he dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . .
St owage compart ment in front cent re console . . . . . .
St owage compart ment for spect acles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
St orage compart ment in t he front and rear doors . . . .
St owage compart ment below front passenger seat . .
Front seat armrest wit h st orage compart ment . . . . . .
St owage compart ment in rear cent re console . . . . . . .
St orage compart ment s in t he luggage compart ment .
Flexible st orage compart ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removable t hrough-loading bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clot hes hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heat ing and air condit ioning syst em . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Int roduct ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air out let vent s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air condit ioning syst em (manual air condit ioning
syst em) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Climat ronic (aut omat ic air condit ioning) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary heat ing (auxiliary heat ing and vent ilat ion) . .
Driving Tips
General Maint enance
61
61
63
65
66
66
70
70
74
75
76
77
78
78
79
80
80
80
81
81
82
82
82
83
83
84
84
84
85
85
86
86
87
88
89
92
95
St art ing-off and Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Set t ing st eering wheel posit ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignit ion lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
St art ing t he engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front and rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise cont rol syst em (CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(START-STOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aut omat ic gearbox DSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Aut omat ic gearbox DSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communicat ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mult ifunct ion st eering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal t elephone preinst allat ion GSM II . . . . . . . . . .
Voice cont rol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Music playback via Bluet oot h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mult imedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safet y
99
99
99
100
102
102
103
104
105
108
110
112
112
117
117
119
124
125
125
...........................................
128
Passive Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
128
128
129
Basic informat ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Correct seat ed posit ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belt s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why seat belt s? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The physical principle of a front al collision . . . . . . . . . .
Import ant safet y informat ion regarding t he use of
seat belt s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How are seat belt s correct ly fast ened? . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Airbag syst em . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Descript ion of t he airbag syst em . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driver's knee airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Breakdow n assist ance
Technical dat a
132
132
132
133
134
137
137
138
140
141
Table of Cont ent s

Head airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deact ivat ing an airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
143
144
Transport ing children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
146
146
148
151
152
What you should know about t ransport ing children! .

Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Att aching a child seat using t he ISOFIX syst em . . . .
Att aching child seat using t he Top Tet her syst em . .
Driving Tips
...................................
153
Int elligent t echnology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
153
153
155
156
157
157
158
158
158
159
160
Elect ronic st abilit y programme (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake boost er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ant ilock brake syst em (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uphill St art Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Elect romechanical power st eering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tyre pressure monit oring syst em . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel part icle filt er (diesel engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Off-road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving and t he environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The first 1 500 kilomet res and t hen aft erwards . . . . . .
Cat alyt ic convert er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving in an economical and environment ally
conscious manner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environment al compat ibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mot oring abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Avoiding damage t o your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving t hrough bodies of wat er on roads . . . . . . . . . . .
Off-road driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing a t railer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing a t railer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Maint enance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning t he
vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care of t he ext erior of vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care of t he int erior of vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
162
162
162
163
166
167
167
167
168
178
178
180
180
180
180
184
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pet rol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspect ing and Replenishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine compart ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling syst em . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bat t ery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield washer syst em . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels and Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories, changes and replacement of part s .
186
186
187
187
189
189
191
193
195
196
199
201
201
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
207
207
Breakdow n assist ance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
208
Fuel consumpt ion according t o t he ECE st andards and

EU guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ot her informat ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil specificat ions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine 1.2 l/ 77 kW TSI - EU5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine 1.4 l/ 90 kW TSI - EU5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine 1.8 lt r./ 118 kW TSI - EU2, EU5 (1.8 lt r./ 112 kW TSI
- EU5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine 1.6 l/ 77 kW TDI CR - EU5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine 2.0 l/ 81 kW TDI CR - EU5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine 2.0 l/ 103 kW TDI CR - EU4, EU5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine 2.0 l/ 125 kW TDI CR - EU5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mult i-purpose vehicles (AF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..................................................
Index
Breakdow n assist ance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Space for first -aid box and warning t riangle . . . . . . . . .
Fire ext inguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle t ool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump-st art ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses and light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Elect ric fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical dat a
208
208
208
208
209
209
213
216
217
220
220
223
...............................
228
Technical dat a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
228
228
228
228
228
229
General informat ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Used abbreviat ions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ident ificat ion det ails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.............................................
229
230
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
239
240
Table of Cont ent s
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Technical dat a
Layout of t his Ow ner's Manual (explanat ions)

The Ow ner's Manual has been syst emat ically designed, in order t o make it easy
for you t o find and absorb t he informat ion you require.
Chapt ers, t able of cont ent s and subject index

The t ext of t he Owner's manual is divided int o relat ively short sect ions which are
combined int o easy-t o-read chapt ers. The chapt er you are reading at any part icular moment is highlight ed at t he bot t om right of t he page.
The Table of cont ent s is arranged according t o t he chapt ers and t he det ailed Subject index at t he end of t he Ow ner's Manual helps you t o rapidly find t he informat ion you are looking for.
Sect ions
The majorit y of Sect ions apply t o all models.
Since t here is a wide range of different equipment and opt ions available it is clearly unavoidable, despit e dividing t he cont ent s int o sect ions, t hat ment ion may be
made of equipment which is not fit t ed t o your vehicle.
Brief informat ion and inst ruct ions

Each sect ion has a Heading.
This is followed by Brief inf ormat ion (in large italic let t ering), which t ells you t he
subject which is dealt w it h in t his sect ion.
Most of t he illust rat ions are accompanied by an Inst ruct ion (in relat ively large let t ers) which explains t o you in a st raight forw ard w ay t he act ion you have t o t ake.
Work st eps w hich have t o be carried out are illust rat ed wit h a hyphen.
Direct ion indicat ions

All direct ion indicat ions such as left , right , front , rear relat e t o t he direct ion
of t ravel of t he vehicle.
Explanat ion of symbols

End of a sect ion.
The sect ion is cont inued on t he next page.
Not es
All four kinds of not es, which are used in t he t ext , are always st at ed at t he end of
t he respect ive sect ion.
WARNING
The most import ant not es are marked w it h t he heading WARNING. These
WARNING not es draw your at t ent ion t o a serious risk of accident or injury.
While reading t he t ext you w ill frequent ly encount er a double arrow f ollow ed
by a small w arning symbol. This symbol is int ended t o draw your at t ent ion t o a
WARNING not e at t he end of t he sect ion t o w hich you must pay caref ul at t ent ion.
CAUTION
A Caut ion not e draw s your at t ent ion t o t he possibilit y of damage t o your vehicle
(e.g. damage t o gearbox), or point s out general risks of an accident .
For t he sake of t he environment

An Environment al not e draw s your at t ent ion t o environment al prot ect ion aspect s. This is w here you w ill, for example, find t ips aimed at reducing your fuel
consumpt ion.
Not e
A normal Not e draw s your at t ent ion in a general way t o import ant informat ion.
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Technical dat a
Cockpit
Fig. 1 Cockpit
Cockpit
Using t he syst em
Cockpit
Overview
18
This overview will help you t o quickly familiarise yourself wit h t he

displays and t he control element s.
20
19
Elect ric ext erior mirror adjust ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 Air out let vent s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 Lever for t he multi-funct ional swit ch:
Turn signal light , headlight and parking light , headlight flasher . .
Speed regulat ing syst em . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 St eering wheel:
wit h horn
wit h driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
w it h cont rols for radio, radio navigat ion syst em and phone . . . . . .
5 Inst rument clust er: Inst rument s and indicat or light s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 Lever for t he mult i-funct ional swit ch:
Mult i-funct ional indicat or . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield wiper and w ash syst em . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 Air out let vent s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 Cont rol dial for heat ing on t he driver's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9 Sw it ch for hazard warning light s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 Indicat or light for a swit ched off front seat passenger airbag . . . . . . .
11 St orage compart ment on t he dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12 Depending on equipment fit t ed:
Radio
Radio navigat ion syst em
13 Cont rol dial for heat ing on t he front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14 St orage compart ment on t he front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15 Front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16 Sw it ch for t he front passenger front airbag (in front passenger
st ow age compart ment ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17 Pow er w indow s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
21
58
87
22
23
24
51
108
25
26
27
28
138
117
10
29
30
14
54
87
69
50
145
81
31
32
33
Fuse box (on side of dash panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Light sw it ch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Release lever engine compart ment lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cont rol dial for t he inst rument light ing and cont rol dial for t he
headlight beam range regulat ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lever for adjust ing t he st eering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
driver's knee airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignit ion lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Swit ch for TCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front and rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cent ral locking swit ch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Depending on equipment fit t ed:
Gearshift lever (manual gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select or lever (aut omat ic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
St orage compart ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Offroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tyre pressure monit oring syst em . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Depending on equipment fit t ed:
Operat ing cont rols for t he heat ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operat ing cont rols for t he air condit ioning syst em . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operat ing cont rols for Climat ronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
220
45
189
49, 50
99
140
99
154
104
35
102
113
82
160
158
105
88
89
92
Not e
Cars w it h fact ory-fit t ed radio or navigat ion syst em are supplied w it h separat e
inst ruct ions for operat ing such equipment .
69
80
138
The arrangement of t he cont rols and swit ches and t he locat ion of some it ems
on right -hand drive models may differ from t hat show n in f ig. 1. The symbols on
t he cont rols and swit ches are t he same as for left -hand drive models.
145
39
Technical dat a
10
Inst rument s and w arning light s

General informat ion
WARNING
Pay at t ent ion primarily t o t he t raf f ic sit uat ion! As t he driver you are f ully
responsible f or road saf et y.
Operat e t he cont rols in t he inst rument clust er never w hile driving, only
w hen t he vehicle is st at ionary!
Overview of t he inst rument clust er
Fig. 2 Inst rument clust er
1
2
1)
Engine revolut ions count er p age 11

Speedomet er p age 11
Valid for countries where t he values are indicat ed in British measuring unit s.
But t on for display mode:

Set hours/ minut es
Act ivat ing/ deact ivat ing t he second speed in mph or km/ h
Service int erval - Display of t he remaining number of days, kilomet res or
miles t o t he next Inspect ion Service/ Reset 1)

4
5
6
7
Coolant t emperat ure gauge p age 11

Display
wit h count er for dist ance driven page 12
wit h Service Int erval Display page 12
wit h digit al clock page 13
wit h Mult i-funct ional display page 14
wit h Informat ion display p age 18
Fuel gauge page 11
But t on for:
Reset t rip count er for dist ance driven
Reset t ing Service Int erval Display
Set hours/ minut es
Act ivat e/ deact ivat e display mode
Not e
This funct ion is only valid for some countries.
Coolant t emperat ure gauge

The coolant t emperat ure gauge 4 f ig. 2 operat es only w hen t he ignit ion is
swit ched on.
Please pay at t ent ion t o t he follow ing guidelines regarding t emperat ure ranges in
order t o avoid damage t o t he engine:
Engine revolut ions count er
If t he symbol in the inst rument clust er flashes it means t hat eit her t he coolant
t emperat ure is t oo high or t he coolant level is t oo low . Please refer t o t he guidelines page 26, Coolant t emperat ure/ Coolant quant it y .
Shift int o t he next higher gear or select t he select or lever posit ion D of t he aut omat ic gearbox before reaching t he red zone of t he rev count er scale.
Avoid high engine speeds during t he driving t ime and before t he engine has been
warmed up t o operat ing t emperat ure p age 162.
WARNING

Shift ing t o a higher gear in good t ime helps t o reduce t he fuel consumpt ion, minimises operat ing noise levels, prot ect s t he environment and contribut es t o a longer life and reliabilit y of t he engine.
Cold range
If t he point er is in t he left -hand area of t he scale it means t hat t he engine has not
yet reached it s operat ing t emperat ure. Avoid running at high engine speeds, at
full t hrot t le and at severe engine loads.
The operat ing range
The engine has reached it s operat ing t emperat ure as soon as t he point er moves
int o t he mid-range of t he scale. The point er may also move furt her t o t he right at
high engine loads and high out side t emperat ures. This is not crit ical provided t he
w arning symbol in t he inst rument clust er does not flash.
The red zone of t he rev count er scale 1 f ig. 2 indicat es t he range in which t he
engine cont rol unit begins t o limit t he engine speed. The engine cont rol unit rest rict s t he engine speed t o a st eady limit value.
Pay at t ent ion t o t he w arning not es p age 190, Working in t he engine compart ment bef ore opening t he bonnet and inspect ing t he coolant level.
CAUTION
Addit ional headlight s and ot her at t ached component s in front of t he fresh air inlet
impair t he cooling efficiency of t he coolant . There is t hen a risk of t he engine
overheat ing at high out side t emperat ures and high engine loads!
Speedomet er
Warning against excessive speeds
An acoust ic warning signal w ill sound when t he vehicle speed exceeds 120 kilomet res per hour. The acoust ic warning signal w ill sw it ch off again w hen t he vehicle speed goes below t his speed limit .
Using t he syst em
11
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge 6 f ig. 2 only operat es when t he ignit ion is swit ched on.
Technical dat a
12
The fuel t ank has a capacit y of about 55 lit res or 60 lit res 1). The warning symbol
in t he inst rument clust er light s up w hen t he point er reaches t he reserve marking.
There are now about 10.5 lit res of fuel remaining in t he t ank. This symbol is a reminder for you, t hat you must ref uel.
The follow ing is displayed in t he informat ion display:
Please ref uel!
An audible signal sounds as an addit ional warning signal.
CAUTION
Never run t he fuel t ank complet ely empt y! An irregular supply of fuel can lead t o
irregular engine running. Unburnt fuel may get int o t he exhaust syst em and damage t he cat alyt ic convert er.
Not e
Aft er filling up, it can occur t hat during dynamic driving (e.g. numerous curves,
braking, driving downhill and climbing a st eep hill) t he fuel gauge indicat es approx. a fract ion less. When st opping or during less dynamic driving, t he correct fuel
supply quant it y is indicat ed. This effect is not a fault .
Fault display
If t here is a fault in t he inst rument clust er Error will appear cont inuously in t he
display. Have t he fault rect ified as soon as possible by a specialist w orkshop.
WARNING
Never seek t o adjust t he t rip count er f or dist ance driven w hile driving f or
saf et y reasons!
Not e
If vehicles which are fit t ed wit h t he informat ion display t he display of t he second
speed is act ivat ed in mph or km/ h, t his driving speed is indicat ed inst ead of t he
count er for t he t ot al dist ance driven.
Service reminder indicat or
Count er for dist ance driven

The dist ance w hich you have driven w it h your vehicle is shown in kilomet res (km).
In some count ries t he measuring unit mile is used.
Reset but t on
If you hold t he reset but t on 7 f ig. 2 pressed for about 1 second, t he t rip count er
is set back t o zero.
Trip count er for dist ance driven
The t rip count er indicat es t he dist ance which you have driven since t his count er
w as last reset - in st eps of 100 met res or 1/ 10 of a mile.
Count er f or dist ance driven
The count er for dist ance driven indicat es t he t ot al dist ance in kilomet ers or miles
w hich t he vehicle has been driven.
1)
Valid for Yet i 4x4
Fig. 3 Service Int erval Display: Not e
Depending on t he equipment inst alled in t he vehicle, t he t ext can differ on t he

display.
Service Int erval Display
Before t he next service int erval a key symbol and t he remaining kilomet res are
indicat ed aft er sw it ching on t he ignit ion f ig. 3. At t he same t ime, a display appears regarding t he remaining days unt il t he next service int erval.
The follow ing is displayed in t he informat ion display:
Service af t er ... km or... days.

The kilomet re indicat or or t he days indicat or reduces in st eps of 100 km. or days
unt il t he service due dat e is reached.
A flashing key symbol and t he t ext Service appears in t he display for 20 seconds as soon as t he due dat e for t he service is reached.
The following is displayed in t he informat ion display:
Service now !
Display regarding t he dist ance and days unt il t he f ollow ing service int erval
You can use t he but t on 3 t o display t he remaining dist ance driven and t he days
unt il t he next service int erval f ig. 2.
A key symbol and a display regarding t he remaining kilomet res appear for 10
second in t he display. At t he same t ime, a display appears regarding t he remaining
days unt il t he next service int erval.
On vehicles w hich are equipped w it h an informat ion display, you can call up t his
display in t he menu Set t ings p age 20.
The following w ill be displayed in t he informat ion display for 10 seconds:
Service af t er ... km or... days.
Not e
Never reset t he display bet ween service int ervals ot herwise t his may result in
incorrect readout s.
informat ion is ret ained in t he Service Int erval Display also aft er t he bat t ery of
t he vehicle is disconnect ed.
If t he inst rument clust er is exchanged aft er a repair, t he correct values must
be ent ered in t he count er for t he Service Int erval Display. This w ork is carried out
by a specialist garage.
The dat a displayed is t he same aft er reset t ing t he display wit h flexible service
int ervals (QG1) is displayed as t hat for a vehicle w it h fixed service int ervals (QG2).
We t herefore recommend having t he Service Int erval Display reset only by an aut horised KODA Service Part ner w ho is familiar wit h t he procedure for reset t ing
t he display wit h a vehicle syst em t est er.
Please refer t o t he brochure Service schedule for ext ensive informat ion about
t he service int ervals.
The t ime is set w it h t he but t ons 3 f ig. 2 and 7 .
We recommend having t his reset t ing performed by a specialist garage.
On vehicles which are fit t ed w it h t he informat ion display, it is possible t o set t he

t ime in t he menu Time p age 20.
reset s t he memory of t he display aft er the appropriat e inspect ion;

makes an ent ry in t he Service Schedule;
affix t he st icker w it h t he ent ry of t he following service int erval t o t he side of
t he dash panel on t he driver's side.
Select t he display which you wish t o change wit h t he but t on 3 and carry out t he
change w it h t he but t on 7 .
WARNING
The clock should not be adjust ed w hile driving for saf et y reasons but only
w hen t he vehicle is st at ionary!
Reset t he service int erval displays by using t he reset but t on 7 f ig. 2 on t he t rip
count er.
On vehicles w hich are equipped w it h an informat ion display, you can call up t his
display in t he menu Set t ings p age 20.
CAUTION
We recommend t hat you do not reset t he Service Int erval Display yourself ot herwise t his can result in t he service int erval display being incorrectly set , w hich may
also result in problems wit h operat ion of your vehicle.
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Digit al clock
Reset t ing Service Int erval Display

It is only possible t o reset t he Service Int erval Display, if a service message or at
least a pre-w arning is shown on t he display of t he inst rument clust er.
The specialist garage:
13
Technical dat a
14
Shift recommendat ion for changing gears
Dist ance driven
page 16
Average speed
page 17
Current speed
page 17
Oil t emperat ure
page 17
page 17
On vehicles w hich are fit t ed out w it h informat ion display, it is possible t o sw it ch

off t he display of some informat ion.
CAUTION
Pull out t he ignit ion key while having cont act w it h t he display (for example w hen
cleaning) in order t o prevent any damage.
Fig. 4 Recommendat ion for changing

gears
Not e
An informat ion for t he engaged gear A f ig. 4 is shown in t he display of t he inst rument clust er.
In cert ain nat ional versions t he displays appear in t he Imperial syst em of

measures.
In order t o minimise t he fuel consumpt ion, a recommendat ion for shift ing int o anot her gear is indicat ed in t he display.
If t he display of t he second speed is act ivat ed in mph, t he current speed is not

indicat ed in km/ h on t he display.
If t he cont rol unit recognises t hat it is appropriat e t o change t he gear, an arrow B

is show n in t he display. The arrow point s up or down, depending on w het her it is
recommended t o shift into a higher or low er gear.
At t he same t ime, t he recommended gear is indicat ed inst ead of t he current ly engaged gear A .
Memory
Mult i-funct ional indicat or (onboard comput er)

Int roduct ion
The mult i-funct ional indicat or appears in t he display f ig. 5 or in t he informat ion
display p age 18 depending on t he equipment fit t ed t o your vehicle.
The mult i-funct ional indicat or offers you a range of useful informat ion.
The out side t emperat ure
p age 15
Driving t ime
p age 16
Current fuel consumpt ion
p age 16
Average fuel consumpt ion
p age 16
Range
p age 16
Fig. 5 Mult i-f unct ional indicat or
The mult i-funct ional indicat or is equipped wit h t wo aut omat ic memories. The select ed memory is displayed in t he middle of the display field f ig. 5.
The dat a of t he single-t rip memory (memory 1) is show n if a 1 appears in t he display. A 2 shown in t he display means t hat dat a relat es t o t he t ot al dist ance mem
ory (memory 2).

Swit ching over t he memory w it h t he help of t he but t on B f ig. 6 on t he w indscreen wiper lever or wit h t he help of t he but t on D on t he multifunct ion st eering
wheel page 15.
The rocker swit ch A f ig. 6 and t he but t on B are locat ed on t he w indshield

w iper lever. Sw it ching over and reset t ing is performed w it h t he handw heel D on
t he mult ifunct ion steering w heel.
Single-t rip memory (memory 1)
Select ing t he memory
The single-t rip memory collat es t he driving informat ion from t he moment t he ignit ion is sw it ched on unt il it is sw it ched off. New dat a will also flow int o t he calculat ion of t he current driving informat ion if t he t rip is cont inued w it hin 2 hours aft er
sw it ching off t he ignition. If t he t rip is int errupt ed for more t han 2 hours, t he
memory is aut omat ically erased.
15
Aft er briefly pressing t he but t on B on t he w indshield w iper lever or by briefly

pressing t he but t on D on t he mult ifunct ion st eering w heel, you can select t he
desired memory.
Select ing t he f unct ions w it h t he help of t he w indshield w iper lever

Press t he t op or bot t om rocker swit ch A for longer t han 0.5 seconds. In t his
w ay, call up in sequence t he individual funct ions of t he mult i-funct ional indicat or.
Tot al-t rip memory (memory 2)

The t ot al dist ance driven memory gat hers dat a from any number of individual
journeys up t o a t ot al of 19 hours and 59 minut es driving or 1 999 kilomet res driven. 99 hours and 59 minut es driving t ime or 9 999 km driven in vehicles wit h an
Informat ion display. The memory is delet ed w hen eit her of t hese limit s is reached
and t he calculat ion st art s from anew .
Select ing t he f unct ions w it h t he help of t he mult if unct ion st eering w heel
By pressing t he but t on C , you can call up t he menu of t he mult i-funct ional indicat or.
The t ot al-t rip memory will not , cont rary t o the single-t rip memory, be delet ed aft er a period of int errupt ion of driving of 2 hours.
Not e
Turn t he handwheel D upw ards or downwards. In t his w ay, call up in sequence t he individual funct ions of t he mult i-funct ional indicat or.
Set t ing f unct ion t o zero
All informat ion in t he memory 1 and 2 is erased if t he bat t ery of t he vehicle is disconnect ed.
Operat ing w it h t he but t ons on t he w indshield w iper lever and on

t he mult ifunct ion st eering w heel
Select t he memory you want .
Press t he but t on B or D for more t han 1 second.
The follow ing readout s of t he select ed memory w ill be set t o zero w it h t he but t on
B on t he w indshield wiper lever or w it h t he but t on D on t he mult ifunct ion st eering w heel:
average fuel consumpt ion,

dist ance driven,
average speed,
Driving t ime.
You can only operate t he mult i-funct ional indicat or w hen t he ignit ion is sw it ched
on. Aft er t he ignit ion is swit ched on, t he funct ion displayed is t he one w hich you
last select ed before swit ching off t he ignit ion.
Out side t emperat ure

Fig. 6 Mult i-f unct ional indicat or: Cont rols on t he w indshield wiper lever/ cont rols on t he mult ifunct ion st eering wheel
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
The out side t emperat ure appears in t he display when t he ignit ion is sw it ched on.
Technical dat a
16
If t he out side t emperat ure drops below +4 C, a snow flake symbol (w arning signal
for ice on t he road) appears before t he t emperat ure indicat or and a w arning signal
sounds. Aft er pressing t he rocker swit ch A at t he windshield w iper lever f ig. 6
or t he but t on C at t he mult ifunct ion st eering wheel f ig. 6, t he funct ion shown
last is indicat ed.
If you w ish t o det ermine t he average fuel consumpt ion over a cert ain period of
t ime you must set t he memory t o zero at t he st art of t he measurement using t he
but t on B on t he w indshield wiper lever f ig. 6 or wit h t he handwheel D on t he
mult ifunct ion st eering wheel f ig. 6 . A zero appears in t he display for t he first
100 m you drive aft er erasing t he memory.
The indicat ed value w ill be updat ed every 5 seconds while you are driving.
WARNING
Do not only rely upon t he inf ormat ion given on t he out side t emperat ure display t hat t here is no ice on t he road. Please not e t hat black ice may also be
present on t he road surface even at t emperat ures around +4 C w arning,
drive w it h care!
Not e
The amount of fuel consumed will not be indicat ed.
The driving t ime which has elapsed since t he memory was last erased, appears in
t he display. If you w ish t o measure t he driving t ime as of a part icular t ime, you
must set t he memory t o zero at t his moment in t ime by pressing t he but t on B on
t he windshield wiper lever f ig. 6 or t he handwheel D on t he multifunct ion
st eering w heel f ig. 6 for longer t han 1 second.
The readout is show n in st eps of 10 km. Aft er light ing up of t he indicat or light for
t he fuel reserve t he display is show n in st eps of 5 km.
The fuel consumpt ion for t he last 50 km is t aken as a basis for calculat ing t he
range. If you drive in a more economical manner from t his moment on, t he range
will be increased accordingly.
Current consumpt ion
The display appears in lit res/ hour if t he vehicle is st at ionary or driving at a low
speed.
Average fuel consumpt ion

The average fuel consumpt ion since t he memory w as last erased is show n in t he
display in lit res/ 100 km p age 14. This informat ion can help you t o adapt your
st yle of driving t o t he fuel consumpt ion you w ish t o achieve.
If t he memory is set t o zero (aft er disconnect ing t he bat t ery), t he fuel consumpt ion of 10 lt r./ 100 km is calculat ed for t he range; aft erwards t he value is adapt ed
accordingly t o t he st yle of driving.
Dist ance driven
The current fuel consumpt ion level is show n in t he display in lit res/ 100 km. This
informat ion can help you t o adapt your st yle of driving t o t he fuel consumpt ion
you wish t o achieve.
The indicat ed value will be updat ed every 0.5 seconds while you are driving.
Range
The est imat ed range in kilomet res is show n on t he display. It indicat es t he dist ance you can st ill drive w it h your vehicle based on t he present level of fuel in t he
t ank for t he same st yle of driving.
Driving t ime
The maximum dist ance indicat ed in bot h memories is 19 hours and 59 minut es.
99 hours and 59 minut es in vehicles wit h an Informat ion display. The indicat or is
set back t o null if t his period is exceeded.
The dist ance driven since t he memory w as last erased appears in t he display
page 14. If you wish to measure t he dist ance driven of a part icular t ime, you
must set t he memory t o zero at t his moment in t ime by pressing the but t on B on
t he w indshield wiper lever f ig. 6 or t he handw heel D on t he mult ifunct ion
st eering w heel f ig. 6.
The maximum dist ance indicat ed in bot h memories is 1 999 km or on vehicles w it h
informat ion display, it is 9 999 km. The indicat or is set back t o null if t his period is
exceeded.
Average speed
Adjust t he speed limit w hile t he vehicle is moving

Wit h t he A but ton on t he mult i-funct ion w indshield wiper lever or t he handw heel D on t he mult i-funct ion st eering wheel, choose t he menu point Warning against excessive speeds.
The average speed since t he memory w as last erased is shown in t he display in

km/ hour page 14. If you wish t o det ermine t he average vehicle speed over a cert ain period of t ime you must set t he memory t o zero at t he st art of t he measurement using t he but t on B on t he windshield w iper lever f ig. 6 or wit h t he handwheel D on t he mult ifunct ion st eering w heel f ig. 6 .
A zero appears in t he display for t he first approx. 300 m you drive aft er erasing
t he memory.
The indicat ed value will be updat ed every 5 seconds w hile you are driving.
Current speed
You can drive at t he desired speed, e.g. 50 km/ h.
Use t he B but t on on t he mult i-function st eering w heel, or t he handwheel D

on t he mult i-funct ion st eering wheel t o accept t he current speed as t he speed
limit (t he value flashes).
If you w ish t o change t he speed limit t hat was set , it is changed in 5 km/ h int ervals (e.g. t he accepted speed of 47 km/ h increases t o 50 km/ h or decreases t o 45
km/ h).
The current speed w hich is ident ical t o t he display of t he speedomet er, is indicat ed on t he display 2 f ig. 2.
17
Press t he B but t on on t he w indshield wiper lever a second t ime or t he handw heel D on t he mult i-funct ion st eering wheel t o confirm the required speed
limit , or w ait around 5 seconds. The set t ing saves aut omatically (t he value
st ops flashing).
Change or delet e speed limit
Oil t emperat ure
Wit h t he A but ton on t he mult i-funct ion w indshield wiper lever or t he handw heel D on t he mult i-funct ion st eering wheel, choose t he menu point Warning against excessive speeds.
Press t he but t on B on t he w indshield wiper lever or t he handw heel D on t he

mult ifunct ion steering w heel t o delet e t he speed limit .
Press t he but t on B on t he w indshield wiper lever a second t ime or t he handw heel D on t he mult ifunct ion st eering w heel t o act ivat e t he speed limit .
Adjust t he speed limit w hile t he vehicle is st at ionary

Wit h t he A but t on on t he mult i-funct ion st eering w heel f ig. 6 or t he handwheel D on t he mult i-funct ion st eering w heel f ig. 6 , choose t he menu
point Warning against excessive speeds.
If you exceed t he set speed limit , an acoust ic warning signal will sound as a w arning. At t he same t ime t he message Warning against excessive speeds appears
w it h t he set limit value.
If t he oil t emperat ure is lower t han 50 C or if a fault in t he syst em for checking

t he oil t emperat ure is present , t hree lines are displayed inst ead of t he oil t emperat ure.
Choose t he B but t on on t he mult i-funct ion st eering wheel, or t he handw heel

D on t he mult i-funct ion st eering w heel, t he act ivat e t he opt ion for set t ing
t he speed limit (t he value flashes).
Use t he A but t on on t he w indshield wiper lever or t he handwheel D on t he
mult i-funct ion st eering w heel t o set t he required speed limit., e.g. 50 km/ h.
The set speed limit remains st ored even aft er sw it ching off t he ignit ion.
WARNING
Pay at t ent ion primarily t o t he t raf f ic sit uat ion! As t he driver you are f ully responsible f or road saf et y.
Use t he B but t on on t he w indshield wiper lever or t he handwheel D on t he

mult i-funct ion st eering w heel t o confirm t he required speed limit , or w ait
around 5 seconds. The set t ing saves aut omat ically (t he value st ops flashing).
This allows you t o set t he speed in 5 km/ h int ervals.

Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Technical dat a
18
MAXI DOT display (informat ion display)
Main menu
Int roduct ion

The informat ion display provides you w it h informat ion in a convenient way concerning t he current operat ing st at e of your vehicle. The informat ion syst em also
provides you w it h dat a (depending on t he equipment inst alled in t he vehicle) relat ing t o t he radio, mobile phone, mult i-funct ional indicat or, radio navigat ion syst em, t he unit connect ed t o t he MDI input and t he aut omat ic gearbox.
Cert ain funct ions and operat ing condit ions are alw ays being checked on t he vehicle when t he ignit ion is swit ched on and also while driving.
Funct ional fault s, if required repair work and ot her informat ion are indicat ed by
red symbols p age 19 and yellow symbols page 20.
Fig. 7 Inf ormat ion display: Cont rols on t he w indshield w iper lever/ cont rols on t he mult if unct ion st eering w heel
Light ing up of cert ain symbols is combined w it h an acoust ic warning signal.
Operat ing w it h t he but t ons on t he w indshield w iper lever
Inf ormat ion and t ext s giving w arnings are also shown in t he display page 22.
The follow ing informat ion can be shown in t he display (depending on t he equipment inst alled on t he vehicle):
You can act ivat e t he Main Menu by pressing t he rocker swit ch A f ig. 7 for
more t han 1 second.
You can select individual menu point s by means of t he rocker swit ch A . When
t he pushbut t on B is briefly pressed, t he informat ion you have select ed is displayed.
Main menu
page 18
Door, luggage compart ment door and bonnet ajar

w arning
page 19
Service Int erval Display
page 12
Select or lever posit ions for t he aut omat ic gearbox DSG
page 113
Operat ing w it h t he but t ons on t he mult if unct ion st eering w heel
CAUTION
Pull out t he ignit ion key while having cont act wit h t he display (for example w hen
cleaning) in order t o prevent any damage.
You can act ivat e t he Main menu by pressing t he rocker swit ch C f ig. 7 for
more t han 1 second.
By briefly pressing t he C but t on you will reach one level higher.
You can select t he individual menus by pressing t he handw heel D . Aft er briefly pressing t he handwheel D , t he desired menu is indicat ed.
You can select t he follow ing informat ion (depending on t he equipment inst alled
on t he vehicle):
MFD page 14
Audio
Navigat ion
Phone p age 120
Aux. Heat ing p age 95
Assist ant s page 47
Vehicle st at us page 19
Set t ings page 20
Aut o Check Cont rol

Car st at e
The menu point Audio is only t hen displayed w hen t he fact ory-fit t ed car radio is
sw it ched on.
The Aut o Check Cont rol carries out a check of cert ain funct ions and vehicle component s. The check is performed const ant ly when t he ignit ion is swit ched on,
bot h w hen t he vehicle is st at ionary, as well as w hen driving.
The menu point Navigat ion is only t hen displayed w hen t he fact ory-fit t ed radio
navigat ion syst em is sw it ched on.
The menu point Aux. heat ing is only t hen displayed, if t he vehicle is fact ory-fit t ed
wit h auxiliary heat ing.
Some operat ional fault s, urgent repairs, service w ork or ot her informat ion appear
in t he display of t he inst rument clust er. The displays are shown w it h a red or yellow light symbol depending on t he priorit y of t he message.
The menu point Assist ant s is only t hen displayed, if t he vehicle is fit t ed w it h cornering light s.
The red symbols indicat e danger (priorit y 1) while t he yellow symbols indicat e a
w arning (priorit y 2). Informat ion for t he driver may also appear in addit ion t o t he
symbols page 22.
Not e
If w arning messages are show n in t he informat ion display, t hese messages
can be confirmed wit h t he but t on B on t he w indshield wiper lever or w it h t he
but t on D on t he mult ifunct ion st eering wheel in order t o call up t he main menu.
There is at least one error message when t he t erm Vehicle st at us is displayed in

t he menu. Aft er select ing t his menu t he first of t he error messages is displayed.
Several error messages are shown on t he display under t he message e.g. 1/ 3. This
indicat es t hat t he first of a t ot al of t hree error messages is displayed. Invest igat e
t he displayed fault s as soon as possible.
If you do not act ivat e t he informat ion display at t hat moment, t he menu shift s
t o one level higher every 10 seconds.
The operat ion of t he fact ory-fit t ed car st ereo or radio navigat ion syst em is described in separat e operat ing inst ruct ions to be found in t he on-board lit erat ure.
Door, luggage compart ment door and bonnet ajar warning
Priorit y 1 - t hree w arning signals

Priorit y 2 - one warning signal
Red symbols
The symbol goes out as soon as t he doors, luggage compart ment door and bonnet
are complet ely closed.
A w arning signal sounds if t he car is driven at a speed of more t han 6km/ hour and
if t he engine or t he luggage compart ment door is open.
As long as t he operat ional fault s are not rect ified, t he symbols are always indicat ed again. Aft er t he first display, t he symbols are indicat ed w it hout informat ion for
t he driver.
If a fault occurs, a warning signal will also sound in addit ion t o t he symbol and
t ext in t he display:
The door, luggage compart ment and bonnet ajar warning light s up if at least one
door, t he luggage compart ment or bonnet are not closed. The symbol indicat es
which door is st ill open or whet her t he luggage compart ment door or bonnet is
not closed.
A red symbol signals danger.
Bring t he vehicle t o a st op.
Swit ch t he engine off.
Invest igat e t he funct ion indicat ed.
Obt ain professional assist ance.
Meaning of t he red symbols:
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
19
Driving Tips
Technical dat a
20
Engine oil pressure t oo low
p age 25
Overheat ed clut ches of t he aut omat ic

gearbox DSG
p age 30
Three successive w arning signals w ill sound if a red symbol appears.
Unit s
Assist ant s
Alt ernat ive speed displayed (Second speed)
Service Int erval
Fact ory set t ing
Back
Yellow symbols
Aft er select ing t he menu point Back you w ill reach one level higher in t he menu.
A yellow symbol signals a warning.

Check t he relevant funct ion as soon as possible.
Language
Here you can set in w hich language t he warning and informat ion t ext s should be
displayed.
The meaning of t he yellow symbols:
Displays of t he MFA
Check engine oil level,

engine oil sensor dist urbed
Problem w it h engine oil pressure
Here you can sw it ch off or on cert ain displays of t he mult i-funct ional indicat or.
p age 191
Comf ort
Here you can act ivat e, deact ivat e or adjust t he follow ing funct ions:
It is also import ant t o have t he vehicle inspect ed

wit hout delay by a specialist garage. The informat ion about t he maximum permissible engine speed
is displayed t oget her w it h t his symbol.
Rain closing
In cert ain count ries, if a yellow symbol appears one warning signal will sound as
w ell.
If several operat ional fault s of priorit y 2 exist , the symbols appear one aft er t he
ot her and are each illuminat ed for about 5 seconds.
Cent ral locking
Sw it ch on/ off t he cent ral locking and aut omat ic locking

funct ion.
ATA conf irm
Sw it ch on/ off t he acoust ic signal indicating act ivat ion of

t he ant i-t heft alarm syst em.
Set -up
Sw it ch on/ off t he funct ion for aut omat ically closing t he

w indow and panoramic t ilt / slide sunroof in a locked rain
w hen it st art s raininga). If t he funct ion is set and it is not
raining, t he windows including t he panoramic t ilt / slide
sunroof w ill close aut omat ically aft er approx. 12 hours.
You can change cert ain set t ings by means of t he informat ion display. The current
set t ing is show n on t he informat ion display in the respect ive menu at t he t op below t he line.
Window op.
Here you can set t he convenience mode only for t he

driver w indow or for all t he w indow s.
Mirror dow n
Sw it ch on/ off t he funct ion for mirror lowering on t he

front passenger side w hen engaging t he reverse gearb).
You can select t he following informat ion (depending on t he equipment inst alled
on t he vehicle):
Mirror adjust .
Sw it ch on/ off t he funct ion for left and right ext erior
mirror set t ing simult aneously.
Language
MFD Dat a
Convenience
Light s & Vision
Time
Wint er t yres
Fact ory set t ing
Rest ore t he Convenience fact ory set t ing.
a)
This funct ion is only available on vehicles wit h a rain sensor.
b)
This funct ion is only available on vehicles wit h an elect rically adjust able driver seat .

Light s and Visibilit y
When exceeding t he speed, an indicat ion is displayed on t he informat ion display:
Here you can act ivat e, deact ivat e or adjust t he following funct ions:
Coming Home
Swit ch on/ off and adjust t he light durat ion of t he Coming Home funct ion.
Leaving Home
Swit ch on/ off and adjust t he light durat ion of t he Coming Home funct ion.
Dayl. dri. light

Rear w iper
Fact ory set t ing
Wint er t yres max. speed ... km/ h

Measures
Here you can set t he unit s for t emperat ure, consumpt ion and dist ance driven.
Swit ch on/ off t he DAY LIGHT funct ion.
Assist ant s
Here you can adjust t he t ones of t he acoust ic signals of t he parking aid.
Swit ch on/ off t he funct ion for aut omatic rear window
wiping.
Second speed
Here you can swit ch on t he display of t he second speed in mph or in km/ h 1).
Lane ch. flash

Swit ch on/ off t he convenience flashing funct ion.
(convenience f lashing)
Travel mode
Swit ch on/ off t he t ravel model funct ion.

Rest ore t he fact ory set t ing for t he light ing.
Time
Service
Here you can have the kilomet res st ill t o be driven and t he days unt il t he follow ing service int erval show n and t he Service Int erval Display reset .
Fact ory Set t ing
Aft er select ing t he menu Fact ory Set t ing t he fact ory set t ing of t he informat ion
display is est ablished again.
Here you can set t he t ime, t he t ime format (12 or 24 hour indicat or) and t he t ime
change summer/ wint er t ime.
Wint er t yres
Here you can set at which speed a w arning signal should sound. This funct ion is
used for e.g wint er t yres wit h t he permissible maximum speed less t han t he maximum speed of t he vehicle.
1)
Valid for count ries w here t he values are indicat ed in Brit ish measuring units.
Using t he syst em
21
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Technical dat a
22
Warning light s
Overview
The warning light s indicat e cert ain funct ions or faults.
Fig. 8 Inst rument clust er w it h w arning light s
Turn signal light s (t o t he left )
page 23
Turn signal light s (t o t he right )
page 23
Fog light s
page 23
Main beam
page 23
Low beam
page 24
Rear fog light
page 24
Speed regulat ing syst em
page 24
Failure of t he light bulbs
p age 24
Diesel part icle filt er (diesel engine)
p age 24
Airbag system
p age 24
Cont rol syst em for exhaust
page 25
Elect romechanical pow er st eering
page 25
Engine oil
page 25
EPC fault light (pet rol engine)
p age 26
Glow plug syst em (diesel engine)
p age 26
Coolant t emperat ure/ coolant level
p age 26
Tract ion cont rol syst em (TCS)
p age 27
Elect ronic st abilit y programme (ESP)
p age 27
23
WARNING
If you do not pay at t ent ion t o t he w arning light s coming on and t he corresponding descript ions and w arning not es, t his may result in severe injuries or
major vehicle damage.
The engine compart ment of your car is a hazardous area. There is a risk of
injuries, scalding, accident s and f ire w hen w orking in t he engine compart ment , e.g. inspect ing and replenishing oil and ot her f luids. It is also essent ial
t o observe all w arnings p age 190, Working in t he engine compart ment .
Not e
The arrangement of t he indicat or light s depends on t he model version. The
symbols shown in t he following funct ional descript ion are t o be found as indicat or
light s in t he inst rument clust er.
Sw it ch off t ract ion cont rol syst em (TCS)
p age 27
Select or lever lock
p age 27
Tyre pressure
page 28
Ant ilock brake syst em (ABS)
page 28
Boot lid
page 28
Eit her t he left or right indicat or light flashes depending on t he posit ion of t he
t urn signal lever.
Open door
p age 29
The indicat or light flashes at t w ice it s normal rat e if a t urn signal light fails. This
does not apply when t owing a t railer.
Seat belt w arning light
page 28
Sw it ching off t he hazard warning light syst em is sw it ched on will cause all of t he
t urn signal light s as well as bot h indicat or light s t o flash.
Fluid level in windshield w asher syst em
p age 29
Brake syst em
p age 29
Handbrake
p age 29
Generat or
p age 29
Main beam
Fuel reserve
page 30
The indicat or light comes on w hen t he main beam is select ed or also w hen t he
headlight flasher is operat ed.
Dow nhill Drive Support
page 30
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Operat ional fault s are show n in t he inst rument clust er as red symbols (priorit y
1 - danger) or yellow symbols (priorit y 2 - w arning).
Turn signal syst em
Furt her informat ion about t he t urn signal syst em p age 51.
Fog light s
The w arning light comes on w hen t he fog light s are operat ing p age 48.
Furt her informat ion about t he main beam p age 51.
Technical dat a
24
Low beam
The indicat or light comes on w hen low beam is select ed page 45.
t rol unit shift s t he engine int o t he emergency mode, which only has a reduced
power out put . Aft er swit ching t he ignit ion off and on again t he warning light
comes on.
Have t he vehicle inspect ed wit hout delay by your specialist garage.
Rear f og light
WARNING
The w arning light comes on when t he rear fog light s are operat ing p age 49.
Cruise cont rol

The w arning light lights up, w hen operat ing t he speed regulat ing syst em.
Bulb f ailure
Alw ays adjust your speed t o suit w eat her, road, region and t raf f ic condit ions. The rout e indicat ed by t he w arning light must not t empt you t o disregard t he nat ional regulat ions f or road t raf fic.
CAUTION
As long as t he warning light light s up, one must t ake int o account an increased
fuel consumpt ion and in cert ain circumst ances a pow er reduct ion of t he engine.
The w arning light comes on if a bulb is fault y:

up t o 2 seconds aft er t he ignit ion is sw it ched on;
when sw it ching on t he defect ive light bulb.
Not e
Furt her informat ion about diesel part icle filt er p age 159.
The follow ing t ext e.g w ill be displayed in t he informat ion display:
Check f ront right dipped beam!
Diesel part icle f ilt er (diesel engine)

If t he w arning light comes on, t his means t hat soot has accumulat ed in t he
diesel part icle filt er because of t he frequent short dist ances.
In order t o clean t he diesel part iculat e filt er, t he vehicle should be driven at an
even speed of at least 60 km/ h at engine speeds of 1 800 - 2 500 rpm for at least
15 minut es or unt il t he warning light goes out wit h t he 4t h or 5t h gear engaged
(aut omat ic gearbox: posit ion S) w hen t he t raffic sit uat ion permit s it . This increases the exhaust t emperat ure and t he soot deposit ed in t he diesel part icle filt er is
burnt .
Always pay at t ent ion t o t he valid speed limit s
If you do not pay at t ent ion t o t he w arning light coming on and t he corresponding descript ions and w arning not es, t his may result in injuries or major
vehicle damage.
The w arning light goes out aft er t he successful cleaning of t he diesel part icle
filt er.
If t he filt er is not properly cleaned, t he w arning light does not go out and t he
w arning light begins t o flash. The follow ing is displayed in t he informat ion display: Diesel-part icle f ilt er: Ow ner's manual! appears. Aft erw ards t he engine con-
Airbag syst em
Monit oring t he airbag syst em
The warning light comes on for a few seconds when t he ignit ion is swit ched on.
There is a fault in t he syst em if t he w arning light does not go out or flashes while
driving . This also applies if t he w arning light does not come on when t he ignit ion is swit ched on.
The follow ing t ext w ill be displayed in t he informat ion display:
Error: Airbag
The funct ionalit y of t he airbag syst em is also monit ored elect ronically when one
airbag has been sw it ched off.
The f ollow ing sit uat ion applies if t he front , side and head airbags or belt t ensioner have been sw it ched of f using t he vehicle syst em t est er:
The w arning light light s up for 4 seconds aft er swit ching on t he ignit ion and
t hen flashes again for 12 seconds in int ervals of 2 seconds.

Airbag/ belt t ensioner deact ivat ed
WARNING
The f ollow ing sit uat ion applies if t he airbag has been sw it ched of f using t he
sw it ch f or t he airbag in t he f ront passenger st orage compart ment :
Cont act your specialist garage if t he pow er st eering is def ect ive.
t he w arning light comes on for 4 seconds aft er t he ignit ion has been
sw it ched on;
sw it ching off t he airbag is indicat ed in the middle of t he dash panel by t he
light ing up of t he yellow indicat or light in display
p age 145.
Not e
If t he yellow w arning light goes out aft er st art ing t he engine again and a
short drive, it is not necessary t o visit a specialist garage.
If t he bat t ery has been disconnect ed and reconnect ed, t he yellow w arning
light comes on aft er swit ching on t he ignit ion. The w arning light must go out
aft er driving a short dist ance.
WARNING
Have t he airbag syst em checked immediat ely by a specialist garage if a f ault
exist s. Ot herw ise, t here is a risk of t he airbag not being act ivat ed in t he event
of an accident .
25
Engine oil
The w arning light light s up red (low oil pressure)
Cont rol syst em f or exhaust
The w arning light comes on for a few seconds 1) when t he ignit ion is swit ched on.
The w arning light comes on aft er t he ignit ion has been sw it ched on.
St op t he vehicle and sw it ch t he engine off if t he w arning light does not go off

aft er t he engine has st art ed or flashes while driving. Check t he oil level and t op up
w it h oil as necessary p age 191.
If t he warning light does not go out aft er st art ing t he engine or it light s up when
driving, a fault exist s in an exhaust relevant component . The engine management
syst em select s an emergency programme which enables you t o drive t o t he nearest specialist garage by adopt ing a gent le st yle of driving.
Elect romechanical pow er st eering

The w arning light comes on for a few seconds when t he ignit ion is swit ched on.
If t he warning light after sw it ching on t he ignit ion or w hen driving light s up cont inuously, a fault exist s in t he elect romechanical power st eering.
If t he yellow w arning light light s up , t his indicat es a part ial failure of t he
pow er st eering and t he st eering forces can be great er.
If t he red w arning light light s up , t his indicat es a complet e failure of t he
pow er st eering and t he st eering assist has failed (significant ly higher st eering
forces).
Furt her informat ion page 158.
3 peeps sound as an addit ional warning signal.
Do not cont inue your journey if for some reason it is not possible under t he condit ions prevailing t o t op up w it h oil. Keep t he engine sw it ched of f and obt ain professional assist ance from a specialist garage, ot herwise it could lead t o severe engine damage.
Do not drive any furt her if t he warning light flashes even if t he oil is at t he correct
level. Do not run t he engine not at idling speed eit her. Cont act t he nearest specialist garage t o obt ain professional assist ance.
The follow ing t ext will be displayed in t he informat ion display:
Oil Pressure: Engine of f ! Ow ner's manual!
The w arning light light s up yellow (oil quant it y t oo low )
If t he w arning light light s up yellow , t he quant it y of oil in t he engine is probably
t oo low . Check as soon as possible t he oil level or t op up p age 191 wit h engine
oil.
A peep sounds as an addit ional warning signal.
1)
The warning light on vehicles fit t ed w it h information display does not come on aft er swit ching
t he ignit ion on, but only if a fault exist s or t he engine oil level is t oo low.
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Technical dat a
26
Glow plug syst em (diesel engine)

Check oil level!
The warning light light s up for a cold engine when sw it ching on t he ignit ion
(pre-heat posit ion) 2 p age 99. St art t he engine aft er t he indicator light goes
out .
The w arning light will go out if t he bonnet is left open for more t han 30 seconds.
If no engine oil has been replenished, t he w arning light w ill come on again aft er
driving about 100 km.
The glow plug indicat or light will come on for about 1 second if t he engine is at a
normal operat ing t emperat ure or if t he out side t emperat ure is above +5 C. This
means t hat you can st art t he engine right away.
The w arning light flashes yellow (engine oil level sensor f ault y)
A fault on t he engine oil level sensor is indicat ed addit ionally by an audible signal
and t he w arning light coming on several t imes aft er t he ignit ion has been sw it ched on.
There is a fault in t he glow plug syst em if t he w arning light does not come on
or light s up cont inuously; cont act a specialist garage as soon as possible t o obt ain assist ance.
In t his case have t he engine inspect ed w it hout delay by a specialist garage.
If t he w arning light begins t o f lash w hile driving, a fault exist s in t he engine

cont rol. The engine management syst em select s an emergency programme w hich
enables you t o drive t o t he nearest specialist garage by adopt ing a gent le st yle of
driving.

Oil sensor: Workshop!
WARNING
Coolant t emperat ure/ Coolant quant it y
If you must st op for t echnical reasons, t hen park t he vehicle at a saf e dist ance f rom t he t raf f ic and sw it ch of f t he engine and sw it ch on t he hazard
w arning light syst em p age 50.
The warning light comes on for a few seconds 1) when t he ignition is swit ched
on.
The red oil pressure light is not an oil level indicat or! One should t herefore check t he oil level at regular int ervals, pref erably af t er every ref uelling
st op.
Pay at t ent ion t o t he f ollow ing inst ruct ions p age 190 before checking
t he coolant fluid level and opening t he bonnet .
The coolant t emperat ure is t oo high or t he coolant level t oo low if t he warning

light does not go out or flashes while driving.
Do not cont inue your journey if for some reason it is not possible under t he condit ions prevailing t o t op up wit h coolant . Keep t he engine sw it ched off and obt ain
professional assist ance from a specialist garage, ot herw ise it could lead t o severe
engine damage.
The (Elect ronic Power Cont rol) warning light comes on for a few seconds when
t he ignit ion is swit ched on.
1)
The w arning light on vehicles fit t ed w it h information display does not come on aft er swit ching t he
ignit ion on, but only if the coolant t emperat ure is t oo high or t he coolant level is t oo low .
3 peeps sound as an addit ional w arning signal.

In t his case st op and swit ch t he engine of f and check t he coolant level; t op up
t he coolant as necessary.
EPC f ault light (pet rol engine)
If t he w arning light does not go out or light s up aft er st art ing t he engine, a
fault exist s in t he engine cont rol. The engine management syst em select s an
emergency programme which enables you t o drive t o t he nearest specialist garage by adopt ing a gent le st yle of driving.
If t he coolant is w it hin the specified range, t he increased t emperat ure may be

caused by an operat ing problem at t he coolant fan. Check t he fuse of t he coolant
fan, replace it if necessary page 221, Fuse assignment in engine compart ment .
27
Ant i-spin regulat ion (ASR)
Do not cont inue driving if t he warning light does not go off alt hough t he fluid is
at t he correct level and also t he fuse of t he fan is in proper order. Cont act a specialist garage t o obt ain assist ance.
The TCS syst em is swit ched off by pressing t he but t on f ig. 138 and t he warning
light light s up.
Please refer t o t he following guidelines page 193, Cooling syst em.

The following t ext will be displayed in t he informat ion display:
Elect ronic st abilit y programme (ESP)
Check coolant ! Owner's manual!
The w arning light comes on for a few seconds when t he ignit ion is swit ched on.
WARNING
When t he ESP is just act ively st abilizing the vehicle, t he w arning light flashes in
t he inst rument clust er.
If you must st op f or t echnical reasons, t hen park t he vehicle at a saf e dist ance f rom t he t raf f ic and sw it ch of f t he engine and sw it ch on t he hazard
w arning light syst em p age 50 .
The w arning light light s up permanent ly if t here is a fault in t he ESP syst em.
The fact t hat t he ESP syst em operat es t oget her wit h t he ABS means t hat t he ESP
w arning light will also come on if t he ABS syst em is not operating properly.
Take care w hen opening t he coolant expansion bot t le. If t he engine is hot ,
t he cooling syst em is pressurized - risk of scalding! It is best t o allow t he engine t o cool dow n before removing t he cap.
Do not t ouch t he coolant fan The coolant f an may sw it ch on aut omat ically
even if t he ignit ion is of f .
Tract ion cont rol syst em (TCS)
If t he w arning light comes on immediat ely aft er st art ing t he engine, t he ESP
syst em can be swit ched off for t echnical reasons. In t his case, t he ESP syst em can
be swit ched on again by sw it ching t he ignit ion on and off. If t he warning light
goes out , t he ESP syst em is fully funct ional again.
Furt her informat ion on t he ESP page 153, Elect ronic st abilit y programme (ESP).
Elect ronic Dif ferent ial Lock (EDL)
The EDL is a part of t he ESP. A fault in t he EDL is indicat ed by t he light ing up of
t he ESP w arning light in t he inst rument clust er. Have t he vehicle inspect ed immediat ely by your specialist garage. Furt her informat ion on t he EDL p age 154,
Elect ronic Different ial Lock (EDL).
The w arning light comes on for a few seconds w hen t he ignit ion is sw it ched on.
The w arning light comes on when driving when a cont rol cycle is act ivat ed.
The w arning light light s up permanent ly if t here is a fault in t he TCS syst em.
The fact t hat t he TCS syst em operat es t oget her w it h t he ABS means t hat t he TCS
warning light w ill also come on if t he ABS syst em is not operat ing properly.
Not e
If t he warning light comes on immediat ely aft er st art ing t he engine, t he TCS
syst em can be sw it ched off for t echnical reasons. In t his case, t he TCS syst em can
be swit ched on again by swit ching t he ignit ion on and off. If t he w arning light
goes out , t he TCS syst em is fully funct ional again.
If t he bat t ery has been disconnect ed and reconnect ed, t he w arning light comes
on aft er swit ching on t he ignit ion. The warning light must go out aft er driving a
short dist ance.
Furt her informat ion about t he TCS page 154, Tract ion cont rol syst em (TCS).
Not e
If t he bat t ery has been disconnect ed and reconnect ed, t he w arning light comes
on aft er swit ching on t he ignit ion. The w arning light must go out aft er driving a
short dist ance.
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
If t he green w arning light light s up, operat e t he brake pedal. This is necessary,
in order t o be able to move t he select or lever out of t he posit ion P or N.
Furt her informat ion about t he select or lever lock p age 114.
Technical dat a
28
Tyre inflat ion pressure
A fault in t he ent ire brake syst em

If t he ABS warning light comes on t oget her w it h t he brake syst em w arning
light (handbrake must be released), t here is a fault not only in the ABS but also
in anot her part of t he brake syst em .
The w arning light light s up, if t here is a subst ant ial drop in inflat ion pressure in
one of t he t yres. Reduce the speed and check or correct as soon as possible t he
inflat ion pressure in t he t yres p age 201.
WARNING
If t he brake syst em w arning light comes on t oget her w it h t he ABS

warning light st op t he vehicle immediat ely and check t he brake f luid level
in t he reservoir p age 195, Brake f luid. If t he f luid level has dropped below
t he MIN marking, do not drive any f urt her - risk of accident ! Cont act a koda
dealer t o obt ain prof essional assist ance.
If t he w arning light flashes, t here is a syst em fault . Visit t he nearest specialist garage and have t he fault rect ified.
Furt her informat ion about t he t yre pressure monit oring syst em page 158.
WARNING
Pay at t ent ion t o t he f ollow ing inst ruct ions p age 190, Working in t he engine compart ment bef ore checking t he brake f luid level and opening t he bonnet .
When t he w arning light light s up, immediat ely reduce t he speed and
avoid sudden st eering and brake manoeuvres. Please st op t he vehicle w it hout
delay at t he nearest possible st op and inspect t he t yres and t heir inf lat ion
pressures.
If t he brake fluid is at t he correct level, t he ABS cont rol f unct ion has f ailed.
The rear w heels may t hen block very rapidly w hen braking. In cert ain circumst ances, t his can result in t he rear end of t he car breaking aw ay - risk of skidding! Drive caref ully t o t he nearest specialist garage and have t he fault rect ified.
Under cert ain circumst ances (e.g. sport y st yle of driving, w int ry or unpaved
roads) t he w arning light can be delayed or does not light up at all.
Not e
If t he bat t ery has been disconnect ed, t he w arning light comes on aft er swit ching on t he ignit ion. The warning light must go out aft er driving a short dist ance.
Ant ilock brake syst em (ABS)

The w arning light shows t he funct ionalit y of t he ABS.
The w arning light comes on for a few seconds aft er t he ignit ion has been sw it ched on or w hen st art ing t he engine. The warning light goes out aft er an aut omat ic
check sequence has been complet ed.
A f ault in t he ABS
The syst em is not funct ioning properly if t he ABS w arning light does not go out
w it hin a few seconds aft er swit ching on t he ignit ion, does not light up at all or
light s up w hile driving. The vehicle w ill only be braked by t he normal brake syst em. Visit a specialist garage immediat ely and adjust your st yle of driving appropriat ely as you will not know how great t he damage is.
Furt her informat ion about ABS page 157, Antilock brake syst em (ABS).
Seat belt w arning light

The warning light comes on aft er t he ignit ion is swit ched on as a reminder for
t he driver and front passenger t o fast en t he seat belt . The w arning light only goes
out if t he driver or front passenger has fast ened his seat belt .
If t he seat belt has not been fast ened by t he driver or front passenger, a permanent warning signal sounds at vehicle speeds great er t han 20 km/ h and simult aneously t he w arning light flashes.
If t he seat belt is not fast ened by t he driver or front passenger during t he next 90
seconds, t he w arning signal is deact ivat ed and t he warning light light s up permanent ly.
For furt her informat ion on t he seat belt s page 132, Seat belt s.
Boot lid
The warning light comes on w hen t he ignit ion is sw it ched on if t he luggage
compart ment door is open. If t he boot lid opens while driving , the w arning light
light s up and an audible signal sounds.

An audible signal sounds t hree t imes as an addit ional warning signal.
The w arning light comes on even w hen t he ignit ion is swit ched off. The w arning
light light s up for a maximum of 5 minut es.
One should get used t o high pedal forces, long braking dist ances and long free
play of t he brake pedal w hen driving t o t he next specialist garage.
In vehicles wit h an informat ion display, t his w arning light is replaced by a vehicle
symbol page 19
29
For furt her informat ion on t he brake system p age 155, Brakes.
WARNING
Open door
Pay at t ent ion t o t he f ollow ing inst ruct ions p age 190 , Working in t he engine compart ment before checking t he brake f luid level and opening t he bonnet .
The w arning light comes on, if one or several doors are opened. If one of t he
doors opens w hile driving, t he w arning light light s up and an audible signal
sounds.
If t he brake syst em w arning light does not go out a few seconds af t er

sw it ching on t he ignit ion or comes on w hen driving, st op immediat ely and
check t he brake f luid in t he reservoir p age 195. If t he f luid level has dropped below t he MIN marking, do not drive any f urt her - risk of accident ! Cont act
a koda dealer t o obt ain prof essional assist ance.
The w arning light comes on even when t he ignit ion is swit ched off. The w arning
light light s up for a maximum of 5 minut es.
In vehicles wit h an informat ion display, t his w arning light is replaced by a vehicle
symbolp age 19
Handbrake
Windshield w asher fluid level
The w arning light comes on if t he handbrake is applied. An audible warning is

also given if you drive t he vehicle for at least 3 seconds at a speed of more t han 6
km/ h.
The w arning light comes on when t he ignit ion is sw it ched on if t here is insufficient fluid in t he w indshield w asher syst em. Top up w it h liquid p age 199.
The follow ing t ext will be displayed in t he informat ion display:

Top up w ash f luid!
Alt ernat or
Brake syst em
The w arning light light s up w hen t he brake fluid level is t oo low or t here is a
fault in t he ABS.
if t he w arning light flashes and an audible signal sounds t hree t imes, st op and
check t he brake fluid level .
If t here is a fault in t he ABS which also influences t he funct ion of t he brake syst em (e.g. dist ribut ion of brake pressure), t he ABS w arning light comes on and at
t he same t ime t he brake syst em w arning light st art s flashing . Be aware t hat
not only t he ABS but also anot her part of t h brake syst em is defect ive .
Saf et y
The w arning light comes on aft er t he ignit ion has been sw it ched on. It should
go out aft er t he engine has st art ed.
If t he w arning light does not go out aft er t he engine has st art ed, or comes on
w hen driving, drive t o t he nearest specialist garage. The vehicle bat t ery w ill be
discharged in t his case so swit ch off all non-essent ial elect rical component s.
CAUTION
Brake fluid: Ow ner's manual
Using t he syst em
Release parking brake!
Driving Tips
If t he w arning light comes on w hen driving and in addit ion t he warning light
(cooling syst em fault ) also comes on in display, you must t hen st op t he car immediat ely and sw it ch t he engine off - risk of engine damage!
Technical dat a
30
Fuel reserve
WARNING
If you must st op f or t echnical reasons, t hen park t he vehicle at a saf e dist ance
from t he t raff ic and swit ch of f t he engine and sw it ch on t he hazard w arning
light syst em.
The w arning light comes on, if t he fuel level is st ill below 10.5 lit res.
CAUTION
Please ref uel! Range...km
Not e
The Text in t he informat ion display goes out only aft er refuelling and driving a
short dist ance.
Downhill Drive Support

The w arning light comes on for a few seconds when t he ignit ion is sw it ched on.
The w arning light comes on when t he speed of t he car is less t han 30 km/ h and
aft er pressing t he Offroad but t on p age 160.
The w arning light flashes w hen t he Downhill Drive Support act ively int ervenes.
If your vehicle exceeds t he speed of 30 km/ h, t he Dow nhill Drive Support is deact ivat ed. The warning light goes out . If t he speed is subsequent ly reduced below
30 km/ h, t he Dow nhill Drive Support is act ivat ed. The warning light comes on.
The Dow nhill Drive Support is act ivat ed again when t he engine is swit ched off
and t he car is rest art ed wit hin 30 seconds.
The Dow nhill Drive Support is deact ivat ed aft er sw it ching off t he ignit ion.
In t he event of a fault , t he warning light does not come on w hen t he speed of t he
car is less t han 30 km/ h and aft er pressing t he Offroad but t on.
Furt her informat ion about t he Offroad syst em page 160, Off-road.
Temperat ure of t he clut ches of t he aut omat ic gearbox DSG

In t he event t hat t he t emperat ure of t he clut ches of t he aut omat ic gearbox DSG is
t oo high, t he symbol and t he warning are shown in t he Informat ion display:
Gearbox overheat ed. St op! Ow ner's man.!
In t he event t hat t he clut ches of t he aut omat ic gearbox have overheat ed, bring
t he vehicle t o a st op and swit ch off t he engine. You must w ait until t he symbol
and t he w arning go out - risk of gearbox damage! You can cont inue t he t rip as
soon as t he symbol and t he warning go out .
Locking and Unlocking
31

Vehicle key
Not e
Please approach an aut horised KODA Service Part ner if you lose a key since he
can obt ain a new one for you.
Descript ion
Changing t he bat t ery in t he remot e cont rol key
Fig. 9 Set of keys w it hout remot e cont rol/ Keys wit h remot e cont rol key
Tw o keys are provided wit h t he vehicle. Depending on t he equipment , your vehicle can be equipped wit h keys wit hout radio remot e cont rol f ig. 9 - left , or wit h
radio remot e cont rol f ig. 9 - right .
WARNING
Alw ays w it hdraw t he key w henever you leave t he vehicle - even if it is only
f or a short t ime. This is part icularly import ant if children are lef t in t he vehicle.
The children might ot herw ise st art t he engine or operat e elect rical equipment
(e.g. pow er w indow s) - risk of injury!
Fig. 10 Remot e cont rol key - remove cover/ remove bat t ery
Each remot e cont rol key cont ains a bat t ery w hich is housed under t he cover B
f ig. 10. If t he bat t ery is discharged, t he red warning light A does not flash aft er
you press a but t on on t he remot e cont rol key f ig. 9. We recommend t hat you
have t he bat t eries of t he key replaced by an aut horised KODA Service Part ner.
You should, how ever, proceed as follow s if you w ish t o replace t he discharged
bat t ery yourself:
Fold open t he key.
Press off t he bat t ery cover w it h your t humb or using a flat screwdriver at t he
point s of t he arrow s 1 from f ig. 10.
Remove t he discharged bat t ery from t he key by pressing t he bat t ery downw ards at t he point of t he arrow 2 f ig. 10.
Each key cont ains elect ronic component s; t herefore prot ect them against
moist ure and severe shocks.
Insert t he new bat t ery. Ensure t hat t he + symbol on t he bat t ery is facing upw ards. The correct polarit y is shown on t he bat t ery cover.
Keep t he groove of t he keys absolut ely clean as impurit ies (t ext ile fibres, dust
et c.) have a negat ive effect on t he proper operat ion of t he locking cylinder and t he
ignit ion lock.
Posit ion t he batt ery cover on t he key and press on it unt il it is heard t o lock in
place.
Do not w it hdraw t he ignit ion key f rom t he ignit ion lock unt il t he vehicle
has come t o a st op. The st eering lock might ot herw ise engage unint ent ionally
- risk of accident !
CAUTION
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Technical dat a
32
Child safet y lock

Dispose of a used bat t ery in accordance wit h environment al regulat ions.
The child safety lock prevent s t he rear door from being opened
from t he inside.
Not e
Pay at t ent ion t o t he correct polarit y w hen changing t he bat t ery.
The replacement bat t ery must have t he same specificat ion as t he original bat t ery.
If it is st ill not be possible t o unlock or lock t he vehicle wit h t he remot e cont rol
key even aft er replacing the bat t ery, t his means t hat t he syst em has t o be
synchronised page 38.
Elect ronic immobiliser

Fig. 11 Child saf et y locks on t he rear
doors
The electronic immobiliser prevent s t he vehicle being operat ed by

an unaut horised person.
The rear doors are equipped w it h a child safet y lock. You can sw it ch t he child
safet y lock on and off using t he vehicle key.
An elect ronic chip is int egrat ed in t he head of t he key. The immobiliser is deact ivat ed wit h t he aid of t his chip when t he key is insert ed in t he ignit ion lock. The elect ronic immobiliser is aut omat ically act ivat ed when you w it hdraw t he ignit ion key
from t he lock.
Sw it ching child saf et y lock on
Not e
It is only possible t o st art t he engine of your car w it h a Genuine KODA key wit h
t he mat ching code.
Use t he vehicle key t o t urn t he slit in t he rear door t o t he left in t he direct ion
of t he arrow f ig. 11.
Sw it ching child saf et y lock of f

Use t he vehicle key t o t urn t he slit t o t he right against t he direct ion of t he arrow .
So long as t he child safet y lock is swit ched on it is not possible t o open t he door
from t he inside w it h t he door opening lever. In t his case t he door can be opened
only from t he out side.
Cent ral locking syst em
Unlocking a vehicle side door

This select ion funct ion enables t o unlock bot h doors on t he driver's side. The ot her doors and t he fuel filler flap remain locked and are only unlocked aft er repet it ive unlocking.
Descript ion
When using t he cent ral locking and unlocking syst em, all t he doors and t he fuel
filler flap are locked or unlocked at t he same t ime (if it was not set different ly in
t he menu point Set t ings - Convenience of t he informat ion display). The boot lid is
unlocked when opening. It can be opened by pressing t he hand grip above t he licence plat e p age 36.
Operat ion of t he cent ral locking syst em is possible:
from t he out side using t he vehicle key page 34,

using t he but t on for t he cent ral locking syst em p age 35,
wit h a remot e cont rol key page 37,
Indicat or light in t he driver's door

Aft er locking t he vehicle, t he warning light flashes for around 2 seconds in quick
succession, aft erw ards it begins t o flash evenly at longer int ervals.
If t he vehicle is locked and t he safe securing syst em p age 34 is not operat ing,
t he indicat or light in t he driver door flashes for about 2 seconds fast , goes out and
st art s t o flash evenly at longer int ervals aft er about 30 seconds.
If t he indicat or light first of all flashes fast for about 2 seconds, aft erw ards light s
up for about 30 seconds and t hen flashes slow ly, t here is a fault in t he syst em of
t he cent ral locking or t he int erior monit or p age 39. Visit a specialist garage t o
obt ain assist ance.
Convenience operat ion of w indow s
One can open and close t he elect rically powered w indows when unlocking and
locking t he vehicle page 41.
Opening a single door
This funct ion makes it possible t o only unlock t he driver's door. The ot her doors
and t he fuel filler flap remain locked and are only unlocked aft er repet it ive unlocking.
This funct ion can be act ivat ed/ deact ivat ed by a specialist garage.
You can have t he funct ion opening a single door act ivat ed by an aut horised
KODA Service Part ner on request or you can act ivat e it yourself wit h t he aid of
t he Informat ion display p age 20.
Aut omat ic locking and unlocking
All t he doors and t he boot lid are locked aut omat ically once t he car reaches a
speed of about 15 km/ h.
If t he ignit ion key is w it hdraw n, t he car is t hen aut omat ically unlocked again. In
addit ion, it is possible for t he driver t o unlock t he car by pressing t he cent ral locking but t on or by pulling t he door opening lever.
This funct ion can be act ivat ed/ deact ivat ed by a specialist garage.
On vehicles wit h an informat ion display, t his funct ion can be sw it ched on in t he
menu Set t ings Convenience - Door open.
WARNING
Locking t he doors prevent s t hat doors open on t heir ow n in an except ional sit uat ion (accident ). Locked doors also prevent unaut horised ent ry int o t he vehicle f rom out side, for example at road crossings. Locked doors do, how ever,
make it more dif f icult f or rescuers t o get int o t he vehicle in an emergency danger t o lif e!
Not e
In t he event of an accident in which t he airbags are deployed, t he locked doors
are aut omat ically unlocked in order t o enable rescuers t o gain access t o t he vehicle.
Only t he front door w hich is fit t ed with a locking cylinder can be unlocked and
locked using t he key if t he cent ral locking syst em fails. You can lock or unlock
manually t he ot her doors and t he boot lid.
Emergency locking of t he door page 35.
Emergency unlocking of t he boot lid p age 36.
On vehicles w it h an informat ion display, t his funct ion can be sw it ched on in t he

menu Set t ings Convenience - Door open.
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
33
Driving Tips
Technical dat a
34
Saf e securing
Unlocking t he vehicle using t he key
The cent ral locking syst em is equipped wit h a saf e securing syst em. Locking t he
vehicle from t he out side causes t he door locks t o be aut omat ically blocked. The
w arning light flashes for around 2 seconds in quick succession, aft erw ards it begins t o flash evenly at longer int ervals. It is not possible t o open t he doors w it h
t he door handle eit her from t he inside or from t he out side. This act s as an effect ive det errent for at t empts t o break int o your vehicle.
You can deact ivat e t he safe securing syst em by locking t w ice wit hin 2 seconds.
If t he safe securing syst em is not operat ing, t he warning light in t he driver door
flashes for about 2 seconds fast , goes out and st art s t o flash evenly at longer int ervals aft er about 30seconds.
Fig. 12 Turning t he key f or unlocking

and locking t he vehicle
The safe securing syst em is again act ivat ed t he next t ime t he vehicle is unlocked
and locked again.
Turn t he key in t he locking cylinder of t he driver's door in t he direct ion of t ravel (unlock posit ion) A f ig. 12.
If t he vehicle is locked and t he safe securing syst em is deact ivat ed, you can open
t he vehicle from t he inside by pulling on t he door opening lever. The door is unlocked and opened at t he same t ime.
Pull on t he door handle and open t he door.
All t he doors (only t he driver's door on vehicles w it h ant i-t heft alarm syst em)
and t he fuel filler flap are unlocked.
The boot lid is t hen unlocked.
The swit ched on int erior light s come on over t he door cont act .
The safe securing syst em is deact ivat ed.
The w indows open w hile t he key is held in t he unlock posit ion.
The indicat or light in t he driver door st ops flashing if t he car is not fit t ed w it h
an ant i-t heft alarm syst em p age 38.
WARNING
If t he vehicle is locked f rom t he out side and t he saf e securing syst em is act ivat ed, t here must not be any person and animals in t he vehicle as it is t hen
not possible t o open eit her a door or a w indow from t he inside. The locked
doors make it more dif f icult f or rescuers t o get int o t he vehicle in an emergency - hazard!
Not e
Not e
If t he vehicle is equipped w it h an ant i-t heft alarm syst em, you must insert t he key
int o t he ignit ion lock and sw it ch t he ignit ion on w it hin 15 seconds aft er unlocking
t he door in order t o deact ivat e t he ant i-t heft alarm syst em. The alarm w ill be t riggered if you do not sw it ch on t he ignit ion wit hin 15 seconds.
The ant i-t heft alarm syst em is also act ivat ed w it h t he deact ivat ed safe securing syst em when locking t he vehicle. The int erior monit or is how ever not act ivat ed.
When act ivat ing t he Safelock funct ion aft er you lock t he vehicle, t he message
CHECK DEADLOCK w ill appear t o inform you about t his. In vehicles equipped wit h
an informat ion display, t he message Check deadlock! appears Ow ner's manual!
(CHECK DEADLOCK appears.
Locking t he vehicle w it h t he key
Turn t he key in t he locking cylinder of t he driver's door in t he opposit e direct ion of t ravel (lock posit ion) B f ig. 12.
The doors, t he boot lid and t he fuel filler flap are locked.
The swit ched on int erior light s will sw it ch off over t he door cont act .
As long as one door is opened 1), t he vehicle cannot be locked in order t o avoid
inadvert ent ly locking t he key in t he vehicle.
In t he event of an accident in which t he airbags are deployed, t he locked doors
are aut omat ically unlocked from t he inside in order t o enable rescuers t o gain access t o t he vehicle.
The window s and t he elect ric sliding/ t ilt ing roof close while t he key is held in
t he lock posit ion.
The safe securing syst em is act ivat ed immediat ely.
The indicat or light in t he driver door begins flashing.
Not e
If t he driver's door has been opened, t he vehicle cannot be locked.
35
By pressing and holding t he but t on 1 or 2 , you can convenient ly close or open

t he w indow s p age 41.
WARNING
But t on f or t he cent ral locking syst em
The cent ral locking syst em also operat es if t he ignit ion is sw it ched of f . All t he
doors and t he boot lid are locked. Children should never be lef t unat t ended in
t he vehicle since it is diff icult t o provide assist ance f rom t he out side w hen t he
doors are locked. Locked doors make it dif f icult f or rescuers t o get int o t he vehicle in an emergency - hazard!
Not e
The door opening lever and t he but t ons for t he cent ral locking syst em do not operat e w hen t he safe securing syst em is act ivat ed p age 34.
Fig. 13 Cent re console: Cent ral locking
syst em
Emergency locking of t he doors
If t he vehicle w as not locked from t he out side, you can also unlock and lock it w it h
t he rocker swit ch wit hout t he ignit ion swit ched on.
Locking all doors and t he boot lid
Press but t on 1 f ig. 13. The symbol in t he but t on comes on.
Unlocking all doors and t he boot lid
Press but t on 2 f ig. 13. The symbol goes out in t he but t on.
The following applies if you have locked your vehicle using t he but t on 1 :
It is not possible t o open t he doors or t he boot lid from t he out side (safet y feat ure, e.g. when st opping at t raffic light s et c.).
You can unlock t he doors individually from t he inside and open t hem by pulling
t he door opening lever.
Fig. 14 Rear door: Emergency locking of

t he door
An emergency locking mechanism is locat ed on t he rear side of t he doors w hich

have no locking cylinder; it is only visible aft er opening t he door.
Locking
Remove t he panel A f ig. 14.
1)
Is not valid for t he boot lid.
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Technical dat a
36

Insert t he key int o t he slot B and t urn it int o t he horizont al posit ion in t he
direct ion of t he arrow (mirror-invert ed on t he right doors).
WARNING
Ensure t hat t he lock is properly engaged af t er closing t he boot lid. Ot herwise, t he boot lid might open suddenly w hen driving even if t he boot lid lock is
closed - risk of accident !
Re-insert t he panel.
Aft er closing t he door, you can no longer open it from out side. The door can be
unlocked from t he inside by pulling on t he door handle again, and t hen opened
from t he out side.
Never drive w it h t he boot lid f ully opened or slight ly ajar ot herw ise exhaust gases may get int o t he int erior of t he vehicle - risk of poisoning!
Do not press on t he rear w indow w hen closing t he boot lid, it could crack risk of injury!
Boot lid
Not e
Af t er closing t he boot lid, it is aut omat ically locked w it hin 1 second and t he
ant i-t heft alarm syst em is act ivat ed. This applies only if t he vehicle w as locked
before closing t he boot lid.
The funct ion of t he hand grip above t he licence plat e is deact ivat ed when
st art ing off or as of a speed of more t han 5 km/ hour for vehicles wit h cent ral locking. The funct ion of t he hand grip is act ivat ed again w hen t he vehicle has st opped
and a door is opened.
Fig. 15 Handle of boot lid
Emergency unlocking of t he boot lid
Open t he boot lid by pressing t he hand grip above t he licence plat e aft er unlocking t he vehicle using t he key or t he radio remot e cont rol.
Opening t he boot lid
Press on t he handle f ig. 15 and at t he same t ime raise t he boot lid.
Closing t he boot lid

Pull t he boot lid dow n and close it wit h a slight sw ing
.
Fig. 16 Emergency unlocking of t he boot
lid
A handle which makes t he closing easier is locat ed on t he inner paneling of t he

boot lid.
If t here is a fault in t he cent ral locking, you can open t he boot lid as follows:
Fold t he backrest of t he rear seat forwards page 66.
Insert a screw driver or similar t ool int o t he opening in t he t rim in t he direct ion
of arrow 1 f ig. 16 t o t he st op.
Unlock t he lid in direct ion of arrow 2 .
Open t he boot lid/ luggage compart ment door.
Remot e cont rol
37
Unlocking and locking car
Descript ion
You can use t he remot e cont rol key:
t o unlock and lock t he car,
unlocking boot lid,
elect rically open and close t he w indows.
The t ransmit t er wit h t he bat t ery is housed in t he handle of t he remot e cont rol
key. The receiver is locat ed in t he int erior of t he car. The operat ing range of t he
remot e cont rol key is approx. 10 m. But t his range of t he remot e cont rol can be
reduced if t he bat t eries are w eak.
Fig. 17 Remot e cont rol key
The key has a fold-open key bit w hich can be used for unlocking and locking t he
car manually and also for st art ing t he engine.
Locking t he vehicle
Press but t on 3 for about 1 second.
If a lost key is replaced or if t he receiver unit has been repaired or a new unit inst alled, it is t hen necessary for an aut horised KODA Service Part ner t o init ialise
t he syst em. Only aft er t his is it possible t o again use t he remot e cont rol key.
Deact ivat ing saf e securing syst em

Press but t on 3 t w ice in 2 seconds. Furt her informat ion page 34.
Not e
The remot e cont rol is aut omat ically deact ivat ed w hen t he ignit ion is sw it ched
on.
Boot lid remot e release

Press but t on 2 for about 1 second. Furt her informat ion p age 36.
The operat ion of t he remot e cont rol may t emporarily be affect ed by int erference from t ransmit t ers close t o t he car and w hich operat e in t he same frequency
range (e.g. mobile phone, TV t ransmit t er).
Folding out of t he key

Press but t on 4 .
The bat t ery must be replaced if t he cent ral locking or ant i-t heft alarm syst em
does react t o t he remot e cont rol at less t han 3 met res away p age 31.
If t he driver door is opened, t he vehicle cannot be locked using t he remot e
cont rol.
Press t he but t on 1 f ig. 17 for about 1 second.
Folding up of t he key
Press but t on 4 and collapse t he key bit in t he housing.
The t urn signal light s flash t w ice as confirmat ion t hat t he vehicle has been unlocked. The vehicle w ill lock again aut omat ically if you unlock t he vehicle using
but t on 1 but do not open a door or t he boot lid wit hin t he next 30 seconds. The
safelock and/ or ant i-t heft alarm syst em will react ivat e. This funct ion is int ended
t o prevent t he car being unlocked unint ent ionally.
In addit ion, when t he car is unlocked, t he elect rically adjust able seat s and ext erior
mirrors move int o t he posit ion assigned to t his key. The st ored set t ing of driver
seat and ext erior mirrors is ret rieved.
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Technical dat a
38
Ant i-t heft alarm syst em
Display of t he locking
The t urn signal light s flash once t o confirm t hat t he vehicle has been correct ly
locked.
Descript ion
If t he vehicle is locked by pressing t he but t on 3 and some doors or t he boot lid

are not closed, t he t urn signal light s flash only aft er closing.
The ant i-t heft alarm syst em increases t he level of prot ect ion against people seeking t o break int o t he vehicle. The syst em t riggers audible and visual w arning signals if an at t empt is made t o break int o t he vehicle.
WARNING
If t he vehicle is locked f rom t he out side and t he saf e securing syst em is act ivat ed, t here must not be any person in t he vehicle as it is t hen not possible t o
open eit her a door or a window f rom t he inside. The locked doors make it
more dif f icult f or rescuers t o get int o t he vehicle in an emergency - hazard!
How is t he alarm syst em act ivat ed?

The ant i-t heft alarm syst em is act ivat ed aut omat ically when t he vehicle is locked
wit h t he key on t he driver's door or by using t he radio remot e cont rol. It is act ivat ed 30 seconds aft er locking t he door.
Not e
Operat e t he radio remot e cont rol only w hen t he doors and boot lid are closed
and you have visual cont act w it h t he vehicle.
Once in t he car, you must not press t he lock but t on of t he radio remot e cont rol before insert ing t he key int o t he ignit ion lock in order t o avoid t he car being
inadvert ent ly locked and t he alarm syst em being sw it ched on. Should t his happen,
press t he unlock but t on of t he radio remot e cont rol.
Synchonisat ion of t he remot e cont rol
Once you unlock t he vehicle by insert ing t he key int o t he driver door you t hen
have t o insert t he key int o t he ignit ion lock and swit ch t he ignit ion on w it hin 15
seconds aft er opening t he door in order t o deact ivat e t he ant i-t heft alarm syst em.
The alarm w ill be t riggered if you do not sw it ch on t he ignit ion wit hin 15 seconds.
When is t he alarm t riggered?
The follow ing securit y areas of t he locked vehicle are monit ored:
If t he vehicle cannot be unlocked by act uat ing t he remot e cont rol syst em t hen it
is possible t hat t he code in t he key and t he cont rol unit in t he vehicle are no longer synchronised. This can occur when t he but t ons on t he radio-operat ed key are
act uat ed a number of t imes out side of t he operat ive range of t he equipment or
t he bat t ery on t he remot e cont rol was replaced.
This means it is necessary t o synchronise t he code as follows:
press any but t on on t he remot e cont rol;
pressing of t he but t on means t hat t he door will unlock wit h t he key wit hin 1
minut e.
How is t he alarm syst em deact ivat ed?

The ant i-t heft alarm syst em is deact ivat ed if t he vehicle is unlocked by only using
t he radio remot e cont rol. The ant i-t heft alarm syst em is react ivat ed if t he vehicle
is not opened wit hin 30 seconds aft er t ransmit t ing t he radio signal.
Bonnet ,
Boot lid,
Doors,
Ignit ion lock,
Vehicle inclinat ion p age 39,
Vehicle int eriorpage 39,
A drop in volt age of t he on-board power supply,
Socket of t he fact ory-fit t ed t ow ing device.
An alarm is immediat ely t riggered if eit her of t he t w o bat t ery t erminals is disconnect ed w hile t he ant i-t heft alarm syst em is act ivat ed.
How is t he alarm sw it ched of f ?
You sw it ch t he alarm off if you unlock t he vehicle w it h t he radio remot e cont rol or
if you sw it ch t he ignit ion on.

Not e
39
Not e
The working life of t he alarm siren is 6 years. More det ailed informat ion is
available by a specialist garage.
You can swit ch the int erior monit or and t he t owing prot ect ion monit oring off if
t here is a possibilit y t hat movement s from (e.g. children or animals) inside t he vehicle int erior or if t he vehicle must be t ransport ed (e.g. by t rain or ship) or t owed,
might t rigger t he alarm.
Before leaving t he car, check t hat all t he doors, w indow s and t he elect ric sliding/ t ilt ing roof are properly closed in order t o ensure t hat t he ant i-t heft alarm syst em is fully operat ional.
Coding of t he radio remot e cont rol and t he receiver unit precludes t he use of
t he radio remot e cont rol from ot her vehicles.
Int erior monit or and Tow ing prot ect ion monit oring
You can also swit ch off t he int erior monit or and t he t owing prot ect ion monit oring, by deact ivat ing t he safe securing syst em page 34.
The opened st orage compart ment for spect acles reduces the effect iveness of
t he int erior monit or. In order t o ensure t he funct ion of t he int erior monit or t o be
fully operat ional, always close t he st orage compart ment for spect acles before
locking t he vehicle.
Pow er w indow s
But t ons on t he driver's door
Fig. 18 But t on f or int erior monit or and

t ow ing prot ect ion monit oring
Sw it ch of f t he int erior monit or and t ow ing prot ect ion monit oring
Swit ch off t he ignit ion.
Open t he driver door.
Press t he but t on at t he cent re column on t he driver side f ig. 18, t he symbol which light s up in t he but t on changes from red t o orange.
Lock t he vehicle wit hin 30 seconds.
Fig. 19 But t ons on t he driver's door
The power windows operat e only when ignit ion is sw it ched on.
The int erior monit or and t he t owing prot ect ion monit oring are swit ched on again
aut omat ically t he next t ime t he car is locked.
Opening a w indow
A w indow is opened by pressing light ly on t he respect ive but t on in t he door.
The process st ops w hen one releases t he but t on.
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Addit ionally you can open t he window aut omat ically (fully opened) by pressing
t he but t on up t o t he st op. Renew ed pressing of t he but t on causes t he w indow
t o st op immediat ely.
Technical dat a
40
Closing a w indow
CAUTION
A w indow is closed t hrough pulling light ly on t he respect ive but t on in t he

door. The closing process st ops w hen one releases t he but t on.
Keep t he w indow glass clean t o ensure correct funct ion of t he elect ric w indows.
Addit ionally you can close t he w indow aut omat ically (fully closed) by pulling
t he but t on up t o t he st op. Renew ed pulling of t he but t on causes t he w indow
t o st op immediat ely.
In t he event of a freezing up of t he w indscreen, first of all eliminat e t he ice

page 182 and t hen operat e t he power window s ot herw ise t he power window
mechanism could be damaged.
The but t ons for t he individual w indows are locat ed in t he armrest of t he driver's
door f ig. 19, front passenger seat and in t he rear doors page 40.
But t ons f or t he pow er w indow s in t he armrest f or t he driver
A But t on for t he pow er window in t he driver's door
B But t on for t he pow er window in t he front passenger's door
C But t on for t he pow er window at t he rear right door
D But t on for t he pow er window at t he rear left door
S Safet y swit ch
Saf et y pushbut t on
You can deact ivat e t he but t ons for power window s at rear doors by pressing t he
safet y pushbut t on S f ig. 19. The but t ons for power window s at rear doors are
act ivat ed again by pressing t he safet y pushbutt on S again.
Not e
Aft er sw it ching t he ignit ion off, it is st ill possible t o open or close t he w indows
for a furt her 10 minut es. The aut omat ic closing and opening funct ions will not operat e during t his t ime. The power window s are swit ched off complet ely once you
open t he driver or front passenger door.
When driving alw ays use t he exist ing heat ing, air condit ioning and vent ilat ion
syst em for vent ilat ing t he int erior of t he vehicle. If t he window s are opened, dust
as w ell as ot her dirt can get int o t he vehicle and in addit ion t he wind noise is more
at cert ain speeds.
But t on in t he f ront passenger door and in t he rear doors
If t he but t ons for t he rear doors are deact ivat ed, t he indicat or light in t he safet y swit ch S light s up.
WARNING
If you lock t he vehicle from t he out side, do not leave any person in t he vehicle since it is no longer possible t o open t he w indow s from t he inside in an
emergency.
Fig. 20 Posit ion of but t on in f ront passenger door
The syst em is f it t ed w it h a f orce limit er p age 41. If t here is an obst acle,

t he closing process is st opped and t he w indow goes dow n by several cent imet res. You should t hen t ake part icular care w hen closing t he w indow s! You may
ot herw ise suf f er severe injuries as a result of get t ing an arm, for example,
jammed in t he w indow !
A but t on for t he relevant window is provided in t hese doors.
It is recommended t o deact ivat e t he elect rically operat ed power w indow s

in t he rear doors (safet y pushbut t on) S f ig. 19 w hen children are being
t ransport ed on t he rear seat s.
Opening a w indow
Light ly press t he appropriat e but t on dow n and hold it unt il t he w indow has
moved int o t he desired posit ion.
Addit ionally you can open t he w indow aut omat ically (fully opened) by pressing
t he but t on dow n up t o t he st op. Renewed pressing of t he butt on causes t he
w indow t o st op immediat ely.

Closing a w indow
Light ly press t he appropriat e but t on up and hold it unt il t he window has

moved int o t he desired posit ion.
Addit ionally you can close t he w indow aut omat ically (fully closed) by pressing
t he but t on up up t o t he st op. Renewed pressing of t he but t on causes t he window t o st op immediat ely.
WARNING
You should t ake part icular care w hen closing t he w indow s! You may ot herw ise
suf f er severe injuries as a result of get t ing an arm, f or example, jammed in t he
w indow !
You can open and close t he elect rically powered w indow s as follow s w hen unlocking and locking t he vehicle (only close t he panoramic sliding roof):
The syst em is f it t ed w it h a f orce limit er p age 41. If t here is an obst acle, t he

closing process is st opped and t he w indow goes dow n by several cent imet res.
You should t hen t ake part icular care w hen closing t he w indows! You may ot herw ise suf f er severe injuries as a result of get t ing an arm, for example, jammed in t he w indow !
Opening a w indow
Not e
Hold t he key in t he locking cylinder of t he driver's door in the unlock posit ion
or press t he unlock but t on of t he radio remot e cont rol unt il all t he w indows
are opened.
Closing a w indow
Hold t he key in t he locking cylinder of t he driver's door in the lock posit ion or
press t he lock but t on of t he radio remot e cont rol unt il all t he windows are
closed.
You can int errupt t he opening or closing operat ion of t he window s immediat ely by
releasing t he key or t he lock but t on.
Force limit er of t he pow er w indow s

The elect rically operat ed power window s are fit t ed w it h a force limit er. It reduces
t he risk of bruises or injuries when closing the w indows.
If t here is an obst acle, t he closing process is st opped and t he window goes down
by several cent imet res.
If an obst acle prevent s t he w indow from being closed during t he next 10 seconds,
t he closing process is int errupt ed once again and t he window goes down several
cent imet res.
If you t ry t o close t he w indow once again wit hin 10 seconds aft er t he w indow has
gone dow n t w ice, alt hough t he obst acle w as not yet removed, t he closing process
is st opped only. During t his t ime it is not possible t o aut omat ically close t he window . The force limit er is st ill sw it ched on.
WARNING
You should t hen t ake part icular care w hen closing t he w indow s! You may ot herw ise suff er severe injuries as a result of get t ing an arm, f or example, jammed in t he w indow !
Not e
On vehicles fit t ed wit h ant i-t heft alarm syst em t he convenience window opening
is possible by means of t he key in t he locking cylinder only 45 seconds aft er deact ivat ing t he warning syst em or aft er act ivat ing t he ant i-t heft alarm syst em.
The force limit er is swit ched off only, if you at t empt w it hin t he next 10 seconds t o
close t he w indow again - now t he w indow w ill close w it h f ull f orce.
If you wait longer t han 10 seconds, t he force limit er is sw it ched on again.
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Window convenience operat ion
WARNING
Aft er swit ching t he ignit ion off, it is st ill possible t o open or close t he windows
for a furt her 10 minut es. The aut omat ic closing and opening funct ions w ill not operat e during t his t ime. The pow er w indow s are sw it ched off complet ely once you
open t he driver or front passenger door.
41
Driving Tips
Technical dat a
42
Operat ional fault s
Panoramic sliding roof
Aut omat ically operat ed pow er w indow s do not operat e
Int roduct ion
If t he bat t ery of t he car has been disconnect ed and t hen reconnect ed, t he aut omat ically operat ed pow er w indows do not operat e. The syst em must be act ivat ed.
Proceed as follows in order t o re-est ablish t he funct ion:
The panoramic sliding roof wit h sun screen can only be operat ed wit h t he cont rol
dial w hen t he ignit ion is sw it ched on f ig. 21. The cont rol dial has several posit ions.
sw it ch on t he ignit ion,
slight ly pull on t he upper edge of t he relevant but t on and hold it unt il t he w indow is closed,
release t he sw it ch,
you must pull t he respect ive sw it ch again in upw ard direct ion for approx. 3
seconds.
Aft er swit ching off t he ignit ion, it is st ill possible t o open, close and t ilt t he panoramic sliding roof or t he sun screen for approx. 10 minut es. However, it is no longer
possible t o operat e t he panoramic sliding roof and t he sun screen t he moment
you open one of t he front doors.
Opening and t ilt ing t he panoramic sliding roof
Operat ion in w int er

Ice accumulat ing on t he surface of t he windows during t he w int er may result in a
great er resist ance w hen closing t he windows and t he window may st op and move
back several cent imet res
It is necessary t o put t he force limit er out of operat ion in order t o close t he window page 41, Force limit er of t he pow er w indow s.
WARNING
You should t hen t ake part icular care w hen closing t he w indow s! You may ot herw ise suff er severe injuries as a result of get t ing an arm, f or example, jammed in t he w indow !
Fig. 21 Cont rol dial f or t he panoramic

sliding roof
Comf ort posit ion
CAUTION
Open part ially

Turn t he sw it ch t o a posit ion in area D .
Keep t he window glass clean t o ensure correct funct ion of t he elect ric w indows.
In t he event of a freezing up of t he windscreen, first of all eliminat e t he ice
page 182 and t hen operat e t he power window s ot herw ise t he power w indow
mechanism could be damaged.
Turn t he sw it ch t o posit ion C f ig. 21.
Open f ully
Turn t he sw it ch t o posit ion B and hold it in t his posit ion (spring-t ensioned
posit ion).
Tilt ing and closing
In order t o t ilt , press t he swit ch on t he recess in t he direct ion of t he roof.
In order t o close, press down t he sw it ch on t he recess and t hen push it forw ards.

When t he panoramic sliding roof is in t he comfort posit ion, t he int ensit y of t he
wind noise is reduced.
Opening
Briefly press t he but t on E f ig. 22 in order t o fully open.
CAUTION
It may be necessary during w int er t o remove any ice and snow in t he area of t he
panoramic sliding roof before opening it , in order t o prevent damaging t he opening mechanism.
Closing t he panoramic sliding roof

Closing
43
Press t he but t on E and hold it pressed in order t o open in t he desired posit ion. The opening process st ops w hen one releases t he but t on.
Closing
Briefly press t he but t on F f ig. 22 in order t o fully close.
Press t he but t on F and hold it pressed in order t o close in t he desired posit ion. The closing process st ops when one releases t he but t on.
Convenience operat ion
Turn t he swit ch t o posit ion A f ig. 21.
You can also operat e t he panoramic sliding roof and t he sun screen from t he out side using t he remot e cont rol key.
Force limit er
The panoramic sliding roof is fit t ed wit h a force limit er. The panoramic sliding roof
st ops and moves back several cent imet res w hen it cannot be closed because
t here is somet hing in t he w ay (e.g. ice). You can close t he panoramic sliding roof
fully w it hout force limit er by pressing down t he sw it ch on t he recess and t hen
pushing it forw ards unt il t he panoramic sliding roof is fully closed .
Closing t he panoramic sliding roof
WARNING
Hold down t he lock but t on on t he remot e cont rol key unt il t he panoramic sliding roof is closed. The panoramic sliding roof and t he sun screen are closed t oget her.
The closing process st ops w hen one releases t he but t on.
Caref ully close t he panoramic sliding roof - risk of injury!
Opening and closing t he sun screen
Tilt ing t he panoramic sliding roof

Hold down t he unlock but t on on t he remot e cont rol key unt il t he panoramic
sliding roof is t ilt ed. When t ilt ing t he panoramic sliding roof, t he sun screen
opens at t he same t ime.
Not e
The force limit er also operat es for convenience closing.
The panoramic sliding roof can only be t ilt ed but not opened when t he convenience operat ing feat ure is being used.
Fig. 22 But t ons f or sun screen
You can open or close t he sun screen separat ely w it h t he aid of t he but t ons
f ig. 22.
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Technical dat a
44
Emergency operat ion
Aft er init ialising t he panoramic sliding roof, press dow n t he sw it ch on t he recess

and push it forwards for approx. 10 seconds.
Press t he swit ch F f ig. 22 for approx. 10 seconds in order t o init ialise t he sun
screen.
If t he panoramic sliding roof or t he sun screen is not fully closed while disconnect ing and reconnect ing t he bat t ery, first of all the panoramic sliding roof or t he sun
screen must be closed page 43 p age 43. Only t hen t he init ialisat ion can be
performed.
Fig. 23 Det ail of t he headliner/ key-operat ed posit ioning point
You can close and/ or open t he panoramic sliding roof by hand if t he syst em is defect ive. The manual cont rol for t he panoramic sliding roof is locat ed underneat h
t he cover of t he elect ric drive, or underneat h t he glasses st orage box, f ig. 23 left , depending on t he equipment fit t ed t o your vehicle.
Open t he glasses st orage box page 82.
Carefully insert a screwdriver, approximat ely 5 mm w ide, int o t he slot in t he

posit ions show n by t he arrow s 1 f ig. 23.
Carefully fold t he cover and glasses st orage box dow nw ards by gent ly pressing dow n and t urning t he screwdriver.
Insert an Allen key, Group 4, up t o t he st op int o t he opening 2 and close or

open t he panoramic sliding roof.
Refit t he cover/ glasses st orage box by first insert ing t he plast ic plugs before
pushing t he ent ire part upwards.
Have t he fault rect ified by a specialist w orkshop.
Not e
Aft er each emergency operat ion, it is necessary t o init ialise t he roof page 44.
Init ialising t he panoramic sliding roof

Aft er disconnect ing and reconnect ing t he bat t ery, t he panoramic sliding roof and
t he sun screen must be init ialised.
45

Light s
WARNING
Never drive w it h only t he side light s on - risk of accident ! The side light s are
not bright enough t o light up t he road suf f icient ly in f ront of you or t o be seen
by ot her oncoming t raf f ic. In t his case, alw ays sw it ch on t he low beam w hen it
is dark or if visibilit y is poor.
Sw it ching light s on and off
Not e
If t he light sw it ch is in t he posit ion , t he ignit ion key is removed and t he
driver's door is open, an acoust ic warning signal w ill sound. The acoust ic w arning
signal is sw it ched off over t he door cont act w hen t he driver's door is closed (ignit ion off). The vehicle can be parked wit h t he side light s on.
Fig. 24 Dash panel: Light swit ch
Sw it ching on side light s
Push t he main beam lever slight ly forward in t he spring-t ensioned posit ion in
order t o sw it ch on t he main beam f ig. 30.
Sw it ching of f light s (except daylight driving light s)

Turn t he light sw it ch int o posit ion.
The dipped beam cont inues t o shine w hile t he ignit ion is sw it ched on and t he
light swit ch is in t he posit ion or . Aft er swit ching off t he ignit ion, t he low
beam is sw it ched off aut omat ically and only t he side light s come on. The parking
light also goes out after t he ignit ion key is removed.
On models fit t ed wit h right -hand st eering t he posit ion of cert ain sw it ches differs
from t hat show n in f ig. 24. The symbols which mark t he sw it ch posit ions are
ident ical, however.
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
If t he car is parked for a lengt hy period, w e recommend swit ching off all light s,
or leaving only t he parking light s sw it ched on.
The sw it ching on of t he described light s should only be undert aken in accordance w it h t he legal requirement s.
Turn t he light sw it ch f ig. 24 int o posit ion .
Sw it ching on t he low beam and main beam

Turn t he light sw it ch int o posit ion .
If t he light sw it ch is in t he posit ion and t he ignit ion key is removed, t he

light s will go out .
Driving Tips
If a fault occurs in t he light sw it ch, t he low beam comes on aut omat ically
In t he event of cool or humid weat her condit ions, t he headlight s can be mist ed
up from inside.
The t emperature difference bet w een int erior and ext ernal area of t he headlight lenses is decisive.
When t he driving light s are sw it ched on, t he light out let surfaces are free
from mist aft er a short period. The headlight lenses can possibly mist up at t he
border areas.
It also concerns reverse light and t urn signal light s.
This mist has no influence on t he life of t he light ing syst em.
DAY LIGHT
Sw it ching on daylight driving light s
Swit ch on t he ignit ion w it hout t urning t he light sw it ch out of t he posit ion 0 or
Technical dat a
46
Deact ivat ing t he f unct ion daylight driving light s
Sw it ching of f aut omat ic driving lamp cont rol
Pull t he t urn signal light lever t owards t he st eering w heel w it hin 3 seconds aft er swit ching on t he ignit ion and at t he same t ime, slide it down and hold it in
t his posit ion for at least 3 seconds.
If t he light sw it ch is in t he posit ion , t he symbol illuminat es when t he ignit ion

is sw it ched on next t o t he light sw it ch. If t he low beam is act ivat ed w it h t he
light sensor, t he symbol illuminat es addit ionally next t o t he light sw it ch.
Act ivat ing t he funct ion daylight driving light s

Pull t he t urn signal light lever t owards t he st eering w heel w it hin 3 seconds aft er swit ching on t he ignit ion and at t he same t ime, slide it upw ard and hold it
in t his posit ion for at least 3 seconds.
If t he light comes on aut omat ically, t he side light s and low beam as well as licence
plat e light light up at t he same t ime.
If t he aut omat ic light cont rol is swit ched on, t he light is regulat ed w it h t he light
sensor in t he rear mirror holder. If t he light int ensit y drops below t he set value, e.g
when driving during t he day int o a t unnel, t he low beam and t he side light s as
well as t he licence plat e light come on aut omat ically. If t he light int ensit y increases again, t he light s swit ch off aut omat ically.
On vehicles fit t ed w it h an informat ion display, you can also act ivat e or deact ivat e
in t he menu t he funct ion daylight driving light s:
Set t ings
Light s & Vision
Mot orw ay light s

If t he aut omat ic light cont rol has been sw it ched on and t he vehicle speed is over
140 km/ h for at least 10 seconds, t he side light s and low beam are sw it ched on
aut omat ically.
On vehicles wit h separat e light s for daylight driving light s in t he fog light s, t he
parking light s and t he licence plat e light do not come on when act ivat ing t he
funct ion daylight driving light s (neit her front nor rear).
In some count ries, t he nat ional legal provisions require t hat t he rear parking light s
also come on t oget her wit h bulbs for daylight driving light s when act ivat ing t he
funct ion daylight driving light s.
When t he daylight driving light s are swit ched on, t he light ing of t he inst rument
clust er is swit ched on as well.
Aut omat ic driving lamp cont rol
Turn t he light swit ch t o t he posit ion 0, or .
If t he vehicle speed is below 65 km/ h for at least 2 minut es, t he light s are swit ched off.
Rain light s
If you swit ch on t he windscreen w ipe in t he operat ion rain sensor for longer t han
10 seconds or in t he operat ion permanent wipe (posit ion 2 or 3) p age 54
swit ching on for longer t han 15 seconds, t he side light s and low beam are swit ched on aut omat ically. The light swit ches off if t he w indscreen wipe is in operat ion
rain sensor for more t han around 4 minut es or is not swit ched on in t he operat ion
permanent w ipe.
WARNING
Fig. 25 Dash panel: Light sw it ch
Sw it ching on aut omat ic driving lamp cont rol

Turn t he light sw it ch f ig. 25 int o posit ion .
The aut omat ic light cont rol only operat es as a support . The driver is not released f rom his responsibilit y t o inspect t he light and if necessary t o sw it ch on
t he light depending on t he light condit ions. The light sensor cannot det ect f or
example rain or snow . For t hese condit ions w e recommend t o sw it ch on t he
low beam !
47
Coming Home Funct ion
Not e
Do not affix any st ickers in front of t he light sensor, so t hat you do not impair
it s funct ion or put it out of operat ion.
The same principles as for using t he aut omat ic light cont rol also apply t o t he
light w hich is sw it ched on manually p age 45.
The funct ion makes it possible t o sw it ch on t he light s in t he darkness for a short

t ime aft er leaving t he vehicle.
Cornering light s
The cornering light s are used t o illuminat e t he curves by means of t he cone of
light swivelling t oget her wit h t he front headlight wit h Xenon light s. This funct ion
is act ive when t he speed of t he car increases t o more t han 10km/ h.
The sw ivelling funct ion of t he headlight s can be sw it ched off/ on via t he menu
point Assist ant s in t he main menu of t he informat ion display page 18.
The light swit ch is in t he posit ion automat ic driving lamp cont rol and t he
low beam illuminat es.
Aft er opening t he driver's door, t he funct ion Coming Home is sw it ched on.
Close all t he doors and t he boot lid and lock t he vehicle. Aft er a short t ime,
sw it ch all light s off.
Depending on equipment fit t ed t he funct ion Coming Home swit ches on t he following light s:
WARNING
If t he cornering light s are def ect ive, t he headlight s are aut omat ically low ered
t o t he emergency posit ion, w hich prevent s a possible dazzling of oncoming
t raf f ic. Thus t he illuminat ed lengt h of t he road is short ened. Drive caref ully
and have t he car inspect ed immediat ely by a specialist garage.
Sw it ching on Coming Home Funct ion
Parking light s,
Low beam,
Ent ry light ing in t he ext erior mirrors,
Licence plat e light .
Parking light
Coming Home Funct ion

The light s go out 10 seconds aft er closing all t he doors and t he boot lid.
Parking light
If a door or t he boot lid remains open, t he light s go out 60 seconds aft er sw it ching
off t he ignit ion.
Pull t he t urn signal light lever f ig. 30 upw ards or downwards - t he parking
light on t he right and left side of t he vehicle will be sw it ched on respect ively.
The funct ion Coming Home is cont rolled w it h t he light sensor in t he mount of t he
int erior rear mirror. If t he light int ensit y is higher t han t he set value of t he light
sensor, t he Coming Home Funct ion is not sw it ched on aft er swit ching off t he ignit ion.
The parking light only operat es if t he ignit ion is swit ched off.
If you have swit ched on t he right or left t urn signal light and you sw it ch off t he
ignit ion, t he parking light is not aut omat ically sw it ched on.
Parking light on bot h sides
Turn t he light sw it ch int o t he posit ion and lock t he vehicle.
Not e
If t he Coming Home Funct ion is sw it ched on const ant ly, t he bat t ery will be
heavily discharged part icularly in short -haul t raffic.
You can change t he illuminat ion period for t he Leaving Home Funct ion by
means of t he Informat ion display.
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Technical dat a
48
Leaving Home Funct ion
Tourist light
This funct ion makes it possible t o swit ch on t he light s w hen approaching t he vehicle.
Xenon headlight
This mode makes it possible t o drive in count ries wit h opposing t raffic syst em,
driving on t he left / right , w it hout dazzling t he oncoming vehicles. When t he mode
t ourist light is act ive, t he side t o side swivel of t he headlight s is deact ivat ed.
Sw it ching on Leaving Home Funct ion
The light swit ch is in t he posit ion aut omat ic driving lamp cont rol .
Unlock t he vehicle wit h t he radio remot e cont rol - t he light s come on.
The mode t ourist light is act ivat ed/ deact ivat ed via t he Informat ion display in t he
menu:
Depending on equipment fit t ed t he funct ion Leaving Home sw it ches on t he following light s:
Parking light s,
Low beam,
Ent ry light ing in t he ext erior mirrors,
Licence plat e light .
Set t ings
Light s & Vision
Travel mode
Off
Swit ched on
Halogen headlight
When using Halogen headlight s, it is necessary t o st ick a st icker over a cert ain
part of t he headlight s in order t o prevent t he dazzling of oncoming t raffic.
Leaving Home Funct ion

The funct ion Leaving Home is cont rolled w it h t he light sensor in t he mount of t he
int erior rear mirror. If t he light int ensit y is higher t han t he set value of t he light
sensor, t he Leaving Home Funct ion is not sw it ched on aft er unlocking t he vehicle
w it h t he radio remot e cont rol.
You can purchase headlight st ickers from t he range of t he KODA Original Accessories.
Fog light s
Aft er unlocking t he vehicle w it h t he radio remot e cont rol, t he light s come on for
10 seconds. The Leaving Home Funct ion is also sw it ched off aft er t he ignit ion is
switched on and aft er locking t he vehicle.
If no door is opened w it hin 30 seconds, t he light s go out and t he vehicle is locked
aut omat ically.
Not e
If t he Leaving Home Funct ion is sw it ched on const ant ly, t he bat t ery w ill be
heavily discharged part icularly in short -haul t raffic.
You can change t he illuminat ion period for t he Leaving Home Funct ion by
means of t he Informat ion display.
Fig. 26 Dash panel: Light sw it ch
Sw it ch on t he f ront f og lamp
First of all t urn t he light sw it ch int o position or f ig. 26.
Pull t he light swit ch int o posit ion 1 .

The w arning light light s up in t he inst rument clust er w hen t he fog light s are
sw it ched on page 22.
49
The rear fog light is locat ed in t he rear light array on t he driver's side.
CAUTION
The rear fog light should only be sw it ched on if visibilit y is part icularly poor (conform w it h any varying legal provisions) t o avoid dazzling vehicles behind your vehicle.
Fog light s w it h t he f unct ion CORNER

The fog lights wit h t he funct ion CORNER are designed for a bet ter illuminat ion of t he surrounding area near the vehicle when
corning, parking et c.
Inst rument light ing

You can adjust the bright ness of the inst rument light ing.
The fog light s w it h t he funct ion CORNER are adjust ed according t o t he st eering
angle or aft er swit ching on t he t urn signal light 1) in t he following circumst ances:
t he vehicle is st at ionary and t he engine is running or it moves wit h a speed of
maximum 40 km/ h;
t he daylight driving light s are not sw it ched on;
t he low beam is swit ched on or t he light swit ch is in t he posit ion and t he
int ensit y of t he ambient light causes t he low beam t o be swit ched on;
t he fog light s are not sw it ched on;
no reverse gear is engaged.
Not e
Fig. 27 Dash panel: Inst rument light ing
If you engage t he reverse gear during t he act ive funct ion CORNER, bot h fog
light s illuminat e.
Rear fog light

Sw it ching on t he rear f og light
First of all t urn t he light swit ch int o posit ion or f ig. 26.
Pull t he light sw it ch int o posit ion 2 .
Inst rument light ing
Swit ch on t he light .
Turn t he cont rol dial f ig. 27 t o t he desired int ensit y of t he inst rument light ing.
The illuminat ion intensit y of t he Informat ion display page 18 is set aut omat ically. It is only possible t o adjust t he inst rument light ing wit h t he cont rol dial if t he
light int ensit y drops below t he set value of t he light sensor.
The w arning light light s up in t he inst rument clust er when t he rear fog light is
sw it ched on page 22.
Only t he rear fog light of t he t railer light s up if t he vehicle has a fact ory-fit t ed
t ow ing device or a t owing device from KODA original accessories and w hen you
are t ow ing a t railer w hich is fit t ed wit h t he rear fog light .
1)
If bot h swit ch on versions are conflict ing, for example if the st eering wheel is t urned t o t he left and
t he right t urn signal light is swit ched on, the t urn signal light has t he higher priority.
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Technical dat a
50
Headlamp range adjust ment
Swit ch for hazard warning light s
Once t he low beam is swit ched on you can t hen adapt the range of
t he headlight s t o t he load of t he vehicle.
Fig. 29 Dash panel: Swit ch f or hazard

w arning light s
Press swit ch f ig. 29 t o swit ch t he hazard w arning light syst em on or off.
Fig. 28 Dash panel: Light s and Visibilit y
All t he t urn signal light s on t he vehicle flash at t he same t ime w hen t he hazard
warning light syst em is sw it ched on. The indicat or light for t he t urn signals and
t he indicat or light in t he swit ch also flash at t he same t ime. You can also swit ch
on t he hazard warning light syst em if t he ignit ion is swit ched off.
Turn t he cont rol dial f ig. 28 unt il you have adjust ed t he low beam so t hat
oncoming t raffic is not dazzled.
Set t ings
The hazard warning light syst em is sw it ched on aut omat ically if an airbag is deployed in t he event of an accident .
The posit ions correspond approximat ely t o t he following vehicle loads:

- Front seat s occupied, luggage compart ment empt y.
1 All seat s occupied, luggage compart ment empt y.
2 All seat s occupied, luggage compart ment laden.
3 Driver seat occupied, luggage compart ment laden.
Please comply wit h any legal requirement s when using t he hazard warning light
syst em.
Not e
Swit ch on t he hazard warning light syst em if, for example:
CAUTION
Headlamp range adjust ment should always be adjust ed in a way t hat :
it does not dazzle ot her road users, especially oncoming t raffic,
and t he range is sufficient for safe driving.
Not e
Headlight s fit t ed wit h Xenon bulbs adapt aut omat ically t o t he load and driving
st at e of t he vehicle (e.g. accelerat ing, braking) when t he ignit ion is swit ched on
and w hen driving. Vehicles which are equipped wit h Xenon bulbs do not have a
manual headlight range adjust ment cont rol.
you encount er t raffic congest ion,
your vehicle breaks down or an emergency sit uat ion occurs.
The t urn signal and main beam lever

The parking light s and headlight flasher are also swit ched on and
off using t he t urn signal and main beam lever.
51
Inf ormat ion concerning t he f unct ion of t he light s.

The t urn signal syst em only operat es when t he ignit ion is swit ched on. The
corresponding w arning light or in t he inst rument clust er also flashes.
The t urn signal is aut omat ically cancelled aft er negot iat ing a curve.
The indicat or light flashes at t wice it s normal rat e if a bulb of t he t urn signal
light fails.
CAUTION
Use main beam or the headlight flasher only if t his does not risk dazzling ot her
road users.
Not e
Fig. 30 Turn signal and main beam lever
Use only in accordance wit h t he legal requirement s t he described light ing and signal syst ems.
The t urn signal and main beam lever perform t he following funct ions:
Right and left t urn signal light
Push t he lever upwards A or downwards f ig. 30 B .
If you only wish t o flash t hree t imes (t he so-called convenience t urn signal),
push t he lever briefly up t o t he upper or low er pressure point and release it .
This funct ion can be act ivat ed/ deact ivat ed in t he Informat ion display
page 18.
Turn signal for changing lanes - in order t o only flash briefly, move t he lever up
or dow n t o t he pressure point and hold it in t his posit ion.
Main beam
Swit ch on t he low beam.
Push t he lever forwards in direct ion of arrow C (spring-t ensioned posit ion).
If you push t he lever t ow ards t he st eering w heel in direct ion of arrow D

(spring-t ensioned posit ion) t he main beam is swit ched off.
Headlight f lasher
Pull t he lever t ow ards t he st eering wheel (spring-t ensioned posit ion) in direct ion of arrow D - t he main beam and warning light in t he inst rument clust er come on.
Parking light
For a descript ion of t he operat ion, see page 47, Parking light .
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Technical dat a
52
Int erior light ing

Vehicle int erior light ing f ront and rear
If operat ing light s wit h t he door cont act swit ch is enabled, t he light will come on
when:
t he vehicle is unlocked,
one of t he doors is opened,
or t he ignit ion key is removed.
If operat ing light s wit h t he door cont act swit ch is enabled, t he light will go off
when:
t he vehicle is locked,
t he ignit ion is swit ched on,
about 30 seconds aft er all t he doors have been closed.
If a door remains open, or if sw it ch is in posit ion t he int er light ing goes out aft er 10 minut es t o prevent t he bat t ery from discharging.
Fig. 31 Front vehicle int erior light ing
Not e
We recommend having t hese bulbs replaced by a specialist garage.
Light ing of t he st orage compart ment on f ront passenger side
Fig. 32 Reading light s
When opening t he flap of t he st orage compart ment on t he front passenger

side t he light ing in t he st orage compart ment comes on.
The light swit ches on aut omat ically w hen t he parking light is swit ched on and
goes out when t he flap is closed.
Rear vehicle int erior light ing
Sw it ching on t he int erior light ing

Press t he sw it ch at t he point of t he symbol f ig. 31.
Sw it ching off t he int erior light ing
Press t he sw it ch at t he point of t he symbol O.
Operat ing t he light s w it h t he door cont act swit ch
Posit ion t he swit ch int o middle posit ion. On vehicles wit hout int erior monit or,
t he middle posit ion is marked w it h a symbol f ig. 31 - left .
Reading light s
Press swit ch f ig. 32 t o sw it ch t he reading light s on/ off.
Fig. 33 Rear vehicle int erior light ing

Sw it ching on t he int erior light ing
WARNING
Press t he cover glass in t he area of t he symbol f ig. 33.
If t he ent ry light comes on, do not t ouch it s cover - risk of burns!
Sw it ching of f t he int erior light ing

Press t he cover glass in t he area of t he symbol O.
Luggage compart ment light
Operat ing t he light s w it h t he door cont act sw it ch
53
Posit ion t he cover glass int o middle posit ion .
Front door w arning light
The light ing comes on aut omat ically when t he boot lid is opened. If t he lid remains
open for more t han about 10 minut es, t he luggage compart ment light ing swit ches
off aut omat ically.
Visibilit y
Windscreen and rear w indow heat er
Fig. 34 Front door: Warning light
The w arning light is locat ed in t he door t rim panel below f ig. 34.
The w arning light goes on every t ime t he door is opened. The light goes out about
10 minut es aft er opening t he door in order t o avoid discharging t he bat t ery of t he
vehicle.
There is a reflect or inst alled on some vehicles inst ead of t he warning light .
Ent ry light ing

The light ing is posit ioned on t he bot t om edge of t he ext erior mirror.
The light beam is direct ed t ow ards t he ent ry area of t he front door.
The light comes on aft er t he doors have been locked or on opening t he boot lid.
The light goes out aft er sw it ching on t he ignit ion or up t o 30 seconds aft er closing
all t he doors and t he boot lid.
If a door or t he boot lid remains open, t he light goes out w it hin 2 minut es if t he
ignit ion is swit ched off.
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Fig. 35 Sw it ch f or w indscreen heat er/ swit ch for rear window heat er
Windscreen heat er
You can swit ch the w indscreen heat er on or off by pressing t he sw it ch
f ig. 35 - left , t he indicat or light in t he swit ch comes on or goes out .
Rear w indow heat er
You can swit ch the rear w indow heater on or off by pressing t he sw it ch
f ig. 35 - right , t he indicat or light in t he sw it ch comes on or goes out .
The w indscreen and rear window heat er only operat es when the engine is running.
The w indscreen and rear window heat er sw it ches of f aut omat ically aft er 10 minut es.
Technical dat a
54
Windshield w iper and w ash syst em

As soon as t he w indow is de-iced or free from mist , t he heat ing should be sw it ched off. The reduced current consumpt ion will have a favourable effect on fuel
economy p age 166, Saving elect ricit y.
Windshield w iper
You can operate t he windscreen wipers and aut omat ic wipe/ wash
using t he windscreen wiper lever.
Not e
If t he on-board volt age drops, t he front and rear window heat er swit ches off
aut omat ically, in order t o provide sufficient elect rical energy for t he engine cont rol.
The posit ion and t he shape of t he sw it ch can differ depending on equipment
inst alled in t he vehicle.
Sun visors
Fig. 37 Windscreen wiper lever
The windscreen w iper lever f ig. 37 has t he follow ing posit ions:
Finger-operat ed w iping
If you w ish t o w ipe t he windscreen only brief ly, push t he lever int o t he sprung
posit ion 4 . If you hold t he lever in t he lower posit ion for more t han 1 second,
t he w iper wipes fast er.
Fig. 36 Sun visor: Sw ivelling out / double sun visor
Int ermit t ent w iping
You can pull t he sun visor for t he driver or front passenger out of t he fixt ure and
swivel it t oward t he door in t he direct ion of t he arrow 1 f ig. 36.
The vanit y mirrors in t he sun visors are provided w it h covers. Push t he cover in direct ion of arrow 2 .
Posit ion t he lever up int o posit ion 1 .
Set w it h t he swit ch A t he desired break bet w een t he individual wiper

st rokes.
Slow w ipe
On vehicles which are equipped wit h double sun visor, you can also unfold t he
auxiliary visor in direct ion of arrow 3 aft er swivelling t he sun visor.
Fast w ipe
WARNING
The sun visors must not be sw ivelled t o t he side w indow s int o t he deployment area of t he head airbags if any object s, such as ball-point pens et c. are
at t ached t o t hem. This might result in injuries t o t he occupant s if t he head airbag is deployed.

Aut omat ic w ipe/ w ash f or w indscreen
Pull t he lever t ow ards t he st eering wheel int o sprung posit ion 5 , t he wash
syst em sprays immediat ely, t he w indscreen wiper st art s wiping a lit t le lat er.
The wash syst em and t he w indscreen wiper operat e simult aneously at a
speed of more t han 120 km/ h.
Release t he lever. The windscreen wash syst em st ops and t he wiper cont inues for anot her 3 - 4 wiper st rokes (depending on t he period of spraying of t he
windscreen). At a speed of more t han 2 km/ h, t he wiper w ipes once again 5
seconds aft er t he last w iper st roke in order t o wipe t he last drops from t he
windscreen. This funct ion can be act ivat ed/ deact ivat ed by a specialist garage.
Move t he lever int o posit ion 1 .
You can set t he sensit ivit y of t he sensor individually wit h swit ch A .
Wiping t he rear w indow pane

Push t he lever away from t he st eering wheel int o posit ion 6 - t he w indshield
wiper will operat e every 6 seconds.
Aut omat ic w ipe/ w ash f or t he rear w indow pane
Press t he lever from t he st eering w heel forw ard int o t he sprung posit ion 7 ,
t he w ash syst em sprays immediat ely, t he w indscreen wiper st art s wiping a lit t le lat er. As long as you hold t he lever in t his posit ion, t he w iper operat es as
well as t he w ash syst em.
Let t ing go of t he lever w ill cause t he windscreen w ash syst em t o st op and t he
wiper t o cont inue for anot her 2 - 3 w iper st rokes (depending on t he period of
spraying of t he windscreen). The lever will st ay in posit ion af t er releasing it
6.
Sw it ching w indscreen w ipers of f

Move t he lever back int o it s home posit ion 0 .
Aft er t he w indscreen wiper swit ches off each t ime or t he ignit ion sw it ches off for
t he t hird t ime, t he posit ion of t he windscreen w iper changes, t his count eract s an
early fat igue of t he w iper rubbers. Aft er st art ing t he vehicle, t he front w indow
wipers aut omat ically move int o t he low er rest posit ion.
1)
The w indscreen wipers and t he wash syst em only operat e if t he ignit ion is swit ched on and t he bonnet is closed 1).
The rear w indow wiper operat es only if the boot lid is closed.
If t he int ermit t ent wipe is sw it ched on, t he int ervals are also cont rolled depending
on speed.
The rain sensor aut omat ically regulat es the break bet w een t he individual wiper
st rokes depending on t he int ensit y of t he rain.
The rear w indow will be wiped again if t he front w indow wipers are on w hen reverse gear is select ed.
Top up w it h wash liquid page 199.
Rain sensor
Wint er posit ion

If t he w indscreen wipers are in rest posit ion, t hey cannot be folded out from t he
w indscreen. For t his reason we recommend adjust ing t he windscreen w ipers in
w int er so t hat t hey can be folded out from t he w indscreen easily. You can set t his
rest posit ion yourself as follows:
Swit ch on t he windscreen w ipers.
Swit ch off t he ignit ion. The windscreen wipers remain in t he posit ion in which
t hey w ere w hen swit ching off t he ignit ion.
You can also use t he service posit ion page 57 as a w int er posit ion.
WARNING
Properly maint ained w indscreen w iper blades are essent ial f or clear visibilit y and saf e driving p age 57.
Do not use t he w indscreen w asher syst em at low t emperat ures, w it hout
heat ing t he w indscreen bef orehand. Ot herw ise t he w indow cleaner could
freeze on t he w indscreen and rest rict t he view t o t he f ront .
The rain sensor only operat es as a support . The driver is not released f rom
t he responsibilit y t o set t he f unct ion of t he w indscreen w ipers manually depending on t he visibilit y condit ions.
On vehicles which do not have a cont act swit ch for t he bonnet , t he w indshield w iper and w ash syst em operat es also w hen t he bonnet is opened.
Using t he syst em
55
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Technical dat a
56

CAUTION
In cold t emperat ures and in w int er, check before t he t rip or before sw it ching
on t he ignit ion t hat t he wiper blades are not frozen. Sw it ching on windscreen
w ipers w hen t he blades are frozen t o t he w indscreen may result in damage bot h
t o t he blades and t he mot or of t he windscreen wipers!
If you sw it ch off t he ignit ion while t he windscreen w ipers are on, t he w ipers
w ill sweep in t he same mode t he next t ime t he ignit ion is sw it ched on. At low
t emperat ures, t he w ipers may freeze t o t he w indow bet ween swit ching off t he ignit ion and t he next t ime you swit ch t he ignit ion on again.
Carefully det ach frozen w iper blades from t he front or rear window .
Remove snow and ice from t he window w ipers before driving.
Not e
If t he slower 2 f ig. 37 or t he fast er 3 wiper set t ing is sw it ched on and t he
vehicle speed decreases t o below 4 km/ h, t he lower wiper st ep is swit ched on aut omat ically. At a speed increase of more t han 8 km/ h t he previous wiper set t ing is
est ablished again.
Act ivat ion/ deact ivat ion

The funct ion of t he automat ic rear w indow wiper is act ivat ed/ deact ivat ed in t he
informat ion display in the menu:
Set t ings
Light s & Vision
Rear w iper
Not e
The funct ion of t he automat ic rear w indow wiper is only valid for vehicles w hich
are equipped wit h t he informat ion display. The funct ion is act ivat ed in t he fact ory.
Alt ernat ive park posit ion of t he rear w indow w iper

Each t ime aft er sw it ching off t he engine for t he second t ime, t he wiper blade of
t he rear w indow wiper is t ilt ed. Thus, t he life of t he w iper blade is prolonged.
Act ivat ion/ deact ivat ion
If t here is an obst acle on t he w indscreen, t he w iper will t ry t o push aw ay t he

obst acle. If t he obst acle cont inues t o block t he wiper, t he wiper st ops aut omat ically aft er 5 at t empt s t o eliminat e t he obst acle, in order t o avoid a damage t o t he
w iper. Remove t he obst acle and and sw it ch on t he w iper again.
Sw it ch on t he ignit ion.
Push t he operat ing level int o t he posit ion 6 f ig. 37 five t imes in succession
w it hin 5 seconds.
The w indscreen w asher nozzles for t he windscreen are heat ed when t he engine is running and t he out side t emperat ure is less t han +10 C.
Sw it ch off t he ignit ion. Aft er swit ching on t he ignit ion again, the alt ernat ive
park posit ion of t he rear w indow wiper is act ivat ed/ deact ivat ed.
The cont ent of t he windscreen wiper reservoir is 3 lit res. On vehicles w hich are
equipped wit h a headlight cleaning syst em, t he cont ent of t he reservoir is 5.5 lit res. On vehicles fit t ed w it h auxiliary heat ing, t he cont ent of t he windscreen w iper
reservoir is 4.5 lit res.
Aut omat ic rear w indow w iper

If t he w indshield wiper is in posit ion 2 or 3 , t he rear view w indow is wiped every 30 seconds if t he vehicle's speed exceeds 5 km/ h.
When t he rain sensor is act ive (t he lever is in t he posit ion 1 ) t he funct ion is only
act ive if t he front w indow wipers cont inue t o operat e (no break bet ween each
w iping process).
Headlight cleaning syst em

The headlight s are being cleaned aft er t he windscreen has been sprayed for t he
first t ime and fift h t ime, t he low beam or main beam are sw it ched on and t he
windscreen w iper lever was held in t he position 5 f ig. 37 for about 1 second.
The headlight w asher nozzles are moved forward out of t he bumper by t he wat er
pressure for cleaning t he headlight s.
You should remove st ubborn dirt (such as insect residues) from t he headlight lenses at regular int ervals, for example w hen refuelling. Please refer t o t he follow ing
guidelines page 183, The headlight lenses.
You should remove any snow from t he fixt ures of t he washer nozzles and clear ice
in wint er w it h a de-icing spray in order t o ensure proper operat ion of t he cleaning
syst em.

CAUTION
Never remove t he nozzles from t he headlamp cleaning syst em by hand - risk of
damage!
Replacing w iper blades for t he w indscreen w ipers
57
The w iper arms move back int o t he rest posit ion - aft er swit ching on t he ignit ion
and aft er changing t he posit ion of t he window w iper lever or when driving at a
speed great er t han 6km/ h.
Windscreen w iper blades in proper condit ion are essent ial t o obt ain good visibilit y.
Wiper blades should not be allow ed t o become dirt ied by dust , insect remains and
preserving wax.
Juddering or smearing of t he w iper blades could t hen be due to wax residues left
on t he windscreen by vehicle w ashing in aut omat ic vehicle w ash syst ems. It is
t herefore import ant t o degrease t he lips of t he w inscreen wiper blades aft er every pass t hrough an aut omat ic vehicle wash syst em.
WARNING
If t he w indscreen w ipers are handled carelessly, t here is a risk of damage
t o t he w indscreen.
Fig. 38 Wiper blade f or t he w indscreen
wiper
One cannot fold out t he wiper arms in t he rest posit ion from t he w indscreen. Before replacing t he wiper arms you must put t hem int o t he service posit ion.
You should clean t he w iper blades regularly w it h a w indscreen cleaner in

order t o avoid any smears. Clean a w iper blade w it h a sponge or clot h if it is
very dirt y, f or example f rom insect residues.
Replace t he w indscreen w iper blades once or t w ice a year f or saf et y reasons. These can be bought f rom an aut horised KODA Service Part ner.
Service posit ion f or changing w iper blades
Close t he bonnet .
Swit ch t he ignit ion on and t hen again off.
Then press t he w indscreen wiper lever in t he posit ion 4 f ig. 37 w it hin

10 seconds t he wiper arms move int o t he service posit ion.
Replacing t he wiper blade on t he rear w indow w iper
Removing t he w iper blade

Fold w indscreen wiper arm away from t he windscreen.
Press t he locking but t on 1 f ig. 38, in order t o unlock t he wiper blade and
pull off in t he direct ion of t he arrow 2 .
At t aching t he w iper blade

Push t he wiper blade unt il it locks up t o t he st op.
Fig. 39 Wiper blade f or t he rear w indow
Check w het her t he w iper blade is correct ly at t ached.
Fold t he windscreen w iper arm back ont o t he windscreen.
Removing t he w iper blade

Fold w indscreen wiper arm out from t he windscreen and posit ion t he w iper
blade at right angles t o t he wiper arm f ig. 39.
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Hold t he w indow wiper arm at t he t op end w it h one hand.
Technical dat a
58

Wit h t he ot her hand unlock t he locking but t on 1 and remove t he wiper blade
in t he direct ion of arrow 2 .
If t he aut omat ic dimming is swit ched on, t he mirror dims aut omat ically depending
on t he light st riking t he mirror from t he rear. The mirror has no lever on t he bot t om edge of t he mirror. Aft er t he reverse gear is engaged, t he mirror always
moves back int o t he normal posit ion.
At t aching t he w iper blade

Push t he w iper blade unt il it locks up t o t he st op.
Check whet her t he wiper blade is correct ly at t ached.
Fold t he w indscreen wiper arm back ont o t he windscreen.
The same remarks apply here as for p age 57.
Do not at t ach ext ernal navigat ion devices on t he w indshield or in t he vicinit y of

t he aut omat ic dimming int erior mirror .
WARNING
Rear-view mirror
The display light ing of t he ext ernal navigat ion device may cause malf unct ion
of t he aut omat ic dimming int erior mirror risk of accident .
Not e
Manual dimming int erior rear-view mirror
Aut omat ic mirror dimming operat es only properly if t he light striking t he rear
of t he int erior rear-view mirror is not affect ed by ot her object s.
Basic set t ing
t he aut omat ic dimming funct ion or put it out of operat ion.
If you sw it ch off t he aut omat ic dimming int erior rear-view mirror, also t he ext erior mirror dimming is sw it ched off.
Pull t he lever on t he bot t om edge of t he mirror forw ard.
Dimming mirror
Pull t he lever on t he bot t om edge of t he mirror back.
Ext erior mirror

You can adjust the ext erior mirrors elect rically.
Aut omat ic dimming int erior mirror
Fig. 40 Aut omat ic dimming int erior mirror
Sw it ching on t he aut omat ic dimming

Press t he but t on B f ig. 40, t he warning light A light s up.
Sw it ching off t he aut omat ic dimming
Press again t he but t on B - t he warning light goes out A .
Fig. 41 Inner part of door: Rot ary knob
Adjust t he rear mirror before commencing t o drive so t hat t here is a clear view t o
t he rear.
Heat ing of t he ext ernal mirror
Turn t he rot ary knob t o posit ion f ig. 41.

The ext erior mirror heat er only operat es w hen t he engine is running and up t o an
out side t emperat ure of +20 C.
Adjust ing left and right ext erior mirrors simult aneously
Turn t he rot ary knob t o posit ion . The movement of t he mirror surface is ident ical t o t he movement of t he rot ary knob.
The adjust ment of bot h mirrors simult aneously or each individual mirror is possible in t he Informat ion display t able on page 20 in t he menu point Mirror adjust .
(Mirror adjust .).
Adjust ing t he right -hand ext erior mirror
Turn t he rot ary knob t o posit ion . The movement of t he mirror surface is ident ical t o t he movement of t he rot ary knob.
59
WARNING
Convex (curved out w ard) or a spherical ext erior mirrors increase t he vision
field. They do, how ever, make object s appear smaller in t he mirror. These mirrors are only of limit ed use, t heref ore, for est imat ing dist ances t o t he f ollow ing vehicles.
Use w henever possible t he int erior rear mirror, f or est imat ing t he dist ances t o t he f ollow ing vehicles.
Not e
If t he ext erior mirrors are folded in using t he remot e cont rol of t he vehicle key,
t hese are folded back int o t he driving posit ion aft er opening t he door or swit ching
on t he ignit ion.
If t he ext erior mirrors are folded in using t he rot ary knob f ig. 41, t hey can only be folded back into t he driving posit ion using t he rot ary knob.
Sw it ching of f operat ing cont rol

Turn t he rot ary knob t o posit ion .
Folding in bot h ext erior mirrors
Turn t he rot ary knob t o posit ion .
If t he ext erior mirrors w ere folded in using t he remot e cont rol of t he vehicle
key and if t he rot ary knob w as in t he fold-in posit ion before swit ching on t he ignit ion, t he mirrors remain in t he fold-in posit ion t he next t ime t he ignit ion is swit ched on. Folding back int o t he driving position is performed by act uat ing t he rot ary
knob in a different posit ion from t he fold-in posit ion.
Fold in t he ext erior mirrors using t he remot e cont rol key

If all t he w indows are closed, press t he unlock but t on 3 on t he radio remot e
cont rol f ig. 17 for approx. 2 seconds.
Do not t ouch t he surfaces of t he ext erior mirrors if t he ext erior mirror heat er is
swit ched on.
Tilt ing surf ace of front passenger ext erior mirror
You can set t he ext erior mirrors by hand, if t he pow er set t ing funct ion fails at
any t ime, by pressing on t he edge of t he mirror surface.
On vehicles fit t ed w it h a memory for t he driver seat , t he surface of t he mirror t ilt s

dow n slight ly when t he rear gear is engaged and t he rot ary knob is in t he posit ion f ig. 41. This provides an aid in seeing t he kerb of t he pavement when parking t he car.
The mirror ret urns int o it s init ial posit ion, aft er t he rot ary knob is moved out of t he
posit ion and put int o anot her posit ion or if t he speed is more t han 15 km/ h.
Memory f or ext erior mirrors
On vehicles fit t ed w it h a memory for t he driver seat , t he relevant set t ing of t he
ext erior mirror is also st ored aut omat ically w hen t he seat posit ion is st ored
p age 63.
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Cont act your specialist garage if a fault exist s w it h t he power set t ing of t he
ext erior mirrors.
Aut omat ic dimming ext erior mirror on t he driver's side

The ext erior mirror on t he driver's side is dimmed t oget her with t he int erior mirror.
If t he aut omat ic dimming is sw it ched on, t he mirror dims aut omat ically depending
on t he light st riking t he mirror from t he rear.
When t he int erior light s are swit ched on or t he reverse gear is engaged, t he mirror
always moves back int o t he basic posit ion (not dimmed).
Technical dat a
60

Not e
Aut omat ic mirror dimming operat es only properly if t he light st riking t he rear
of t he int erior rear-view mirror is not affect ed by ot her object s.
t he aut omat ic dimming funct ion or put it out of operat ion.
If you sw it ch off t he aut omat ic dimming int erior rear-view mirror, also t he ext erior mirror dimming is swit ched off.
Seat s and St ow age
61

Front seat s
WARNING (Cont inued)
Ensure t hat t here are no object s in t he f oot w ell as any object s may get behind t he pedals during a driving or braking manoeuvre. You w ould t hen no
longer be able t o operat e t he clut ch, t o brake or accelerat e.
Basic informat ion

The front seat s have a w ide range of different set t ings and can t hus be mat ched
t o t he physical charact erist ics of t he driver and front passenger. Correct adjust ment of t he seat s is part icularly import ant for:
safely and quickly reaching t he cont rols;
a relaxed, fat igue-free body posit ion;
achieving t he maximum prot ect ion of f ered by t he seat belt s and t he airbag
syst em.
Do not t ransport any object s on t he front passenger seat except object s

(e.g. child saf et y seat ) provided f or t his purpose - risk of accident !
Adjust ing t he f ront seat s
WARNING
Never t ransport more occupant s t han t he maximum seat ing in t he vehicle.
Each occupant must correct ly f ast en t he seat belt belonging t o t he seat .

Children must be f ast ened p age 146, Transport ing children saf ely w it h a
suit able rest raint syst em.
The f ront seat s and t he head rest raint s must alw ays be adjust ed t o mat ch
t he body size of t he seat occupant as w ell as t he seat belt s must alw ays be
correct ly f ast ened in order t o provide an opt imal prot ect ion f or you and your
occupant s.
Alw ays keep your feet in t he f oot w ell w hen t he car is being driven - never
place your f eet on t he inst rument panel, out of t he w indow or on t he surf aces
of t he seat s. This is part icularly import ant f or t he f ront seat passenger. You
w ill be exposed t o increased risk of injury if it becomes necessary t o apply t he
brake or in t he event of an accident . If an airbag is deployed, you may suf f er
f at al injuries w hen adopt ing an incorrect seat ed posit ion!
It is import ant f or t he driver and f ront passenger t o maint ain a dist ance of
at least 25 cm from t he st eering w heel or dash panel. Not maint aining t his
minimum dist ance will mean t hat t he airbag syst em w ill not be able t o properly prot ect you - hazard! The f ront seat s and t he head rest raint s must alw ays
also be correct ly adjust ed t o mat ch t he body size of t he occupant .
Fig. 42 Cont rols at seat
Adjust ing a seat in a f orw ard/ back direct ion

Pull t he lever 1 f ig. 42 up and push t he seat int o t he desired posit ion.
Release t he lever 1 and push t he seat furt her unt il t he lock is heard t o engage.
Adjust ing height of seat

Lift t he seat if required by pulling or pumping lever 2 upwards.
Lower t he seat if required by pushing or pumping lever 2 downwards.
Adjust t he angle of t he seat backrest

Relieve any pressure on t he seat backrest (do not lean on it ) and t urn t he
handw heel 3 t o adjust t he angle of t he backrest .
Adjust ing lumbar support
Turn t he lever 4 unt il you have set the most comfort able curvat ure of t he
seat upholst ery in t he area of your spine.
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Technical dat a
62
The driver's seat should be adjust ed in such a way t hat t he pedals can be fully
pressed t o t he floor w it h slight ly bent legs.
WARNING
If you w ant t o carry object s on t he folded seat backrest , you w ill need t o
disable t he f ront passenger airbag p age 145, Sw it ch for t he front passenger
front airbag.
The seat backrest on t he driver's seat should be adjust ed in such a way t hat t he
upper point of t he st eering w heel can be easily reached wit h slight ly bent arms.
WARNING
Only adjust t he driver seat w hen t he vehicle is st at ionary - risk of injury!
Take care w hen adjust ing t he seat ! Adjust ing t he seat w it hout care can
lead t o bruises or injuries.
The seat backrest s must not be angled t oo f ar back w hen driving ot herw ise t his w ill af f ect proper operat ion of t he seat belt s and of t he airbag syst em - risk of injury!
Adjust t he seat backrest only w hen t he car is st at ionary.
When moving t he seat backrest , keep limbs aw ay f rom bet w een t he seat
cushion and seat backrest - risk of injury!
When moving t he seat backrest alw ays make sure t he seat backrest has
been properly secured - check t hat it is by pulling on t he seat backrest .
If t he f ront passenger seat backrest is f olded, passengers may only be conveyed on t he out er seat behind t he driver.
Folding seat backrest of t he front passenger seat
Never carry goods on t he f olded seat backrest w hich:

impair driver visibilit y,
make it impossible f or t he driver t o cont rol t he vehicle, e.g. if t hey are
placed under t he pedals, or could prot rude int o t he driver's zone,
could lead t o injury t o passengers due t o a change of direct ion or braking manouvre w hen accelerat ing sharply.
Folding t able on t he seat backrest of t he front seat s
Fig. 43 Folding seat backrest of t he

f ront passenger seat
If required, you can fold t he seat backrest of t he front passenger seat forward int o
a horizont al posit ion.
Folding t he seat backrest f orw ards
Pull t he lever in t he direct ion of arrow f ig. 43 and fold t he seat backrest forward unt il t he unt il t he lock is heard t o engage.
Put t he seat backrest int o t he original posit ion
Pull t he lever in t he direct ion of arrow and pull t he seat backrest forw ard up
unt il t he unt il t he lock is heard t o engage.
Fig. 44 Folding t able on t he seat backrest of t he f ront seat s
Fold t he t able int o t he horizont al posit ion by pulling in t he direct ion of arrow
f ig. 44.
Pushing against t he direct ion of t he arrow folds t he t able back int o t he vert ical posit ion.
63
Adjust t he angle of t he seat cushion
WARNING
The f olding t able must not be in t he horizont al posit ion w hile driving. This
could lead t o injuries in t he event of an accident .
Adjust ing t he seat backrest

Press t he sw it ch C in t he direct ion of t he desired set t ing.
Do not place any hot beverages int o t he f olding t able. If t he vehicle moves,
t hey may spill - risk of scalding!
Do not use any cups or beakers w hich are made of brit t le mat erial (e.g.
glass, porcelain). This could lead t o injuries in t he event of an accident .
Adjust ing lumbar support

Press t he sw it ch A at t he front in order t o enlarge t he curvat ure of t he lumbar support .
CAUTION
Do not leave any open beverages in t he holder. They may spill when braking
and w hile doing so damage t he vehicle.
The folding t able on t he seat backrest of t he front passenger seat s is designed t o hold smaller object s up t o a maximum t ot al w eight of 10 kg.
Adjust ing front seat s elect rically
Press t he sw it ch B at t he front in t he direct ion of arrow 2 or at t he back in

t he direct ion of arrow 3 .
Press t he sw it ch A rear in order t o reduce t he curvat ure of t he lumbar support .
Press t he sw it ch A t op in order t o adjust t he curvat ure of t he lumbar support

higher.
Press t he sw it ch A bot t om in order t o adjust t he curvat ure of t he lumbar support lower.
Sw it ch B is operat ed in order t o move t he seat up/ down and forward/ back, w hile
swit ch C is operat ed in order t o move t he backrest forward or back.
Adjust ing seat s
WARNING
Only adjust t he driver seat w hen t he vehicle is st at ionary - risk of injury!
Caut ion w hen adjust ing t he seat ! You may suf f er injuries or bruises as a result of adjust ing t he seat w it hout paying proper at t ent ion.
In view of t he fact t hat t he seat s can also be adjust ed when t he ignit ion is
sw it ched of f (even w hen ignit ion key w it hdraw n), you should never leave children unat t ended in t he car.
Fig. 45 Side view: Cont rols f or adjust ing t he seat / seat set t ing sw it ch
Adopt t he correct seated posit ion before set t ing p age 61.
Adjust ing a seat in a forw ard/ back direct ion
Press t he swit ch B f ig. 45 forw ards or backwards in t he direct ion of arrow
1.
Not e
If t he movement of t he seat is inadvert ent ly int errupt ed during an adjust ment ,
once again press t he sw it ch in t he appropriat e direct ion and cont inue wit h t he adjust ment of t he seat t o t he end.
Set t he height of t he seat cushion

Press t he swit ch B upw ards or downwards.
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Technical dat a
64
St oring set t ing
Emergency Off
You can int errupt t he set t ing operat ion at any t ime, if you operat e any but t on of
t he driver seat .
Not e
For safet y reasons, it is not possible t o st ore t his posit ion if t he inclinat ion angle of t he seat backrest is more t han 102 in relat ion t o t he seat cushion.
When st oring set t ings wit h t he memory but t ons, w e recommend t hat you begin w it h t he front but t on and assign a memory but t on t o each addit ional driver.
Fig. 46 Driver seat : Memory but t ons
and SET but t on
St oring seat and ext erior mirror set t ings f or driving forw ard
Swit ch on t he ignit ion.
Adjust t he seat p age 63.
Adjust bot h ext erior mirrors p age 58.
Press but t on SET A f ig. 46.
Press one of t he memory but t ons B wit hin 10 seconds aft er pressing t he but t on SET - an acknow ledgement signal confirms t hat t he seat sett ing is st ored..
St oring ext erior mirror set t ing f or reversing
Turn t he ext erior mirror cont rol t o posit ion page 58.
Engage reverse gear.
Move t he right ext erior mirror int o t he desired posit ion p age 58.
Take t he vehicle out of gear. The set posit ion of t he ext erior mirror is st ored.
Memory but t ons

Memory for t he seat offers t he possibilit y t o store t he individual driver seat and
ext ernal mirror posit ion. An individual posit ion can be allocat ed t o each of t he
t hree memory but t ons B f ig. 46, t hat is t hree in t ot al. Aft er pressing t he corresponding memory but t on B , t he seat and t he ext erior mirror are aut omat ically
moved int o t he posit ions which have been allocat ed t o t his but t on page 64.
Each new set t ing stored wit h t he same but t on erases t he previous set t ing.
Each t ime you st ore t he seat and ext erior mirror set t ings for driving forw ard
you also have t o re-st ore t he individual set t ing of t he ext erior mirror on t he passenger side for reversing.
Assigning t he remot e cont rol key t o t he memory but t ons

Aft er st oring t he set t ings of t he seat and ext erior mirrors, you have 10 seconds in
order t o assign t he remot e cont rol t o t he appropriat e memory butt on.
Wit hdraw t he ignit ion key.
Press t he unlock but t on page 37, aft er t he successful assignment an audible

signal will sound. The set t ing is st ored wit h t he memory but t on w hich you
have select ed.
If you w ish t o be able t o ret rieve t he set t ings w hich are st ored in t he memory by
also using t he remot e cont rol, you have t o assign t he remot e cont rol t o a memory
but t on in each case.
If you w ish, you can obt ain an addit ional remot e cont rol key from an aut horised
KODA Service part ner and t hen assign t he remot e cont rol key t o anot her memory but t on.
Not e
If t he remot e cont rol had previously been assigned t o anot her memory but t on,
t his set t ing is t hen erased by t he new assignment .
If you assign t he remot e cont rol t o a memory but t on which has already been
assigned t o a remot e cont rol, t he old assignment is also replaced by a new assign
ment in t his case.
Head rest raint s
The assignment of t he radio remot e cont rol t o a memory butt on is ret ained,
how ever, aft er reassigning t he seat s and ext erior mirrors.
Aft er t he successful assignment , t he t urn signal light s flash and an audible
signal will sound as a confirmat ion. The sett ing is st ored wit h t he memory but t on
which you have select ed.
65
Ret rieving set t ings of t he seat and mirrors

You can ret rieve t he st ored set tings either wit h t he memory but tons or wit h the remot e cont rol.
Ret rieving set t ings wit h memory but t ons
In order t o ret rieve t he st ored set t ing, you have t w o possibilit ies:
Fig. 47 Head rest raint : Adjust ing/ pulling out
By brief ly pressing:Briefly press t he desired memory but t on B f ig. 46. The

seat and ext erior mirror are moved aut omat ically int o t he st ored posit ions (t his
applies only if t he ignit ion is swit ched on and t he speed is less t han 5 km/ h).
Best prot ect ion is achieved if t he t op edge of t he head rest raint is at t he same
level as t he upper part of your head.
By pressing f or a long period of t ime: press and hold t he desired memory but t on B pressed long enough unt il t he seat and t he ext erior mirrors are moved
int o t he st ored posit ions.
Adjust ing t he height of a head rest raint
Ret rieving set t ings w it h remot e cont rol
If t he driver door is closed and t he ignit ion is sw it ched off, briefly press t he unlock but t on of t he remot e cont rol page 37 and t hen open t he driver door.
The seat and ext erior mirrors now move aut omat ically int o t he st ored posit ions.
The mirror ret urns int o it s init ial posit ion, aft er t he rot ary knob is moved out of t he
posit ion and put int o anot her posit ion or if t he speed is more t han 15 km/ h.
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Grasp t he side of t he head rest raint wit h bot h hands and push it in upw ard direct ion as desired f ig. 47 - left .
Move t he head rest raint downwards if required by pressing and holding t he

safet y but t on wit h one hand f ig. 47 - right and by pressing wit h t he ot her
hand t he head rest raint downwards.
Removing and inst alling a head rest raint

Pull t he head rest raint out of t he seat backrest as far as t he st op.
Ret rieving set t ing of ext erior mirror f or reversing

Turn t he rot ary knob for t he ext erior mirror set t ing int o t he posit ion
page 58 before engaging t he reverse gear.
Emergency Of f
You can int errupt t he set t ing operat ion at any t ime, if you operat e any but t on of
t he driver seat .
Press t he locking but t on in t he direct ion of arrow f ig. 47 - right and pull t he
head rest raint out .
To re-insert t he head rest raint , push it down int o t he seat backrest far enough
unt il you hear t he locking but t on engage.
The posit ion of t he front and rear out er head rest raint s is adjust able in height .
The middle rear head rest raint is adjust able in t w o posit ions.
The head rest raint s must be adjust ed t o mat ch t he size of t he seat occupant . Correct ly adjust ed head rest raint s t oget her wit h t he seat belt s offer effect ive prot ec
t ion for t he occupant s page 129, Correct seat ed posit ion.
Technical dat a
66
WARNING
WARNING
The head rest raint s must be correct ly adjust ed in order t o of f er ef f ect ive
prot ect ion f or t he occupant s in t he event of an accident .
The head rest raint s must be correct ly adjust ed in order t o of f er ef f ect ive
prot ect ion f or t he occupant s in t he event of an accident .
Do not drive under any circumst ance w it h removed head rest raint s - risk of
injury!
Do not drive under any circumst ance wit h removed head rest raint s - risk of
injury!
If t he rear seat s are occupied, t he rear head rest raint must not be in t he
low er posit ion.
Middle rear head rest raint
If t he rear seat s are occupied, t he rear head rest raint must not be in t he
low er posit ion.
Rear seat s
Adjust ing seat s in forw ard/ back direct ion
Fig. 48 Rear seat s: middle head rest raint
IIn cert ain count ries nat ional legal provisions also require t he equipment of t he
rear seat wit h fixing eyes for child seat using t he Top Tet her syst em
page 152, At t aching child seat using t he Top Tet her syst em. For vehicles,
w hich are equipped w it h such fixing eyes, a deviat ing sequence for removing t he
middle head rest raint must be observed.
Removing and inst alling t he rear middle head rest raint
Pull t he head rest raint out of t he seat backrest as far as t he st op.
Press t he locking but t on in t he direct ion of arrow f ig. 48 and pull t he head
rest raint out .
To re-insert t he head rest raint , push it down int o t he seat backrest far enough
unt il you hear t he locking but t on engage.
Fig. 49 Releasing at t he f ront / rear
To enlarge t he luggage compart ment , t he out er rear seat s can be pushed forwards, folded fully forwards or t he seat s can be removed.
Moving seat s in f orw ard/ back direct ion
Pull t he lever A f ig. 49 up in t he direction of arrow 1 or on t he release loop
in direct ion of arrow 2 and move t he seat int o t he desired posit ion 3 .
Not e
Please refer t o t he follow ing guidelines page 130, Correct seat ed posit ion for
t he occupant s on t he rear seat s.
Adjust ing t he seat backrest
67
Fold t he middle rear seat backrest forw ards in t he same way, t hen pull once
more on t he lever f ig. 50 and press t he seat backrest downw ards unt il it is
heard t o lock int o a lower posit ion.
Pull t he lever f ig. 51 up and t hen fold t he seat fully forwards.
Secure t he folded forward seat w it h the aid of t he fixing belt B t o a guide rod
of t he head rest raint for t he front seat f ig. 51.
WARNING
Immediat ely secure t he f olded f orw ard seat w it h t he aid of t he fixing belt
t o a guide rod of t he head rest raint f or t he f ront seat - t here is a risk of injury
as soon as t he vehicle st art s of f .
Fig. 50 Adjust ing t he seat backrest
Adjust t he angle of t he seat backrest
Pull t he lever f ig. 50 and adjust t he desired angle of t he seat backrest .
If t he seat is not in t he rear end posit ion, damage can occur t o t he locking
bolt s if t he seat is unlocked.
CAUTION
Folding rear seat s f orw ards
Make sure t hat t he st orage compart ment, t he asht ray and t he cup holder in t he
rear part of t he cent re console are closed (ot herwise t hese could get damaged)
before folding forward t he rear middle seat .
Not e
Please refer t o t he follow ing guidelines p age 129, Correct seat ed posit ion for
t he driver.
Removing seat s
Fig. 51 Fold seat forw ard/ secure f olded forw ard seat s
Folding rear seat s f ully f orw ards and secure

Pult t he belt t ongue int o t he opening of t he w heel housing on t he respect ive
side of t he vehicle - safet y posit ion.
Remove t he head rest raint from t he rear middle seat p age 66.
Move t he rear ext erior seat s as far as possible t o t he rear page 66.
Pull on t he levers f ig. 50 and fold t he seat backrest s of t he rear ext erior
seat s ont o t he seat cushion as far as t he st op.
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Fig. 52 Unlocking t he folded forw ard seat / carrying handles on t he seat cushion
Technical dat a
68
Move seat s int o t he init ial posit ion
Unlocking and removing seat s
Unlock t he folded forward seat by pressing t he seat locks in direct ion of arrow
1 f ig. 52.
Remove t he seat by way of t he carrying handles on t he seat cushion A

f ig. 52 and B .
Not e
The out er seat s are not mut ually int erchangeable. In t he rear area t he left seat is
marked w it h t he let t er L and t he right seat wit h t he let t er R.
Not e
Please refer t o t he following guidelines p age 130, Correct seat ed posit ion for
t he occupant s on t he rear seat s.
Fig. 54 Folding t he seat backrest back

int o posit ion
Adjust ing seat s in crossw ise direct ion
Move t he folded forw ard and unlocked seat on t he guide t ow ards t he middle
of t he vehicle up t o t he st op.
Lock t he seat at t he end of t he guide f ig. 53.
If t he seat is removed, first of all posit ion it on t he guide and lock t he seat
f ig. 53. Check for yourself t hat t he seat is correct ly locked by pulling it up.
Fold t he seat int o t he horizont al posit ion unt il it is heard t o lock. Check for
yourself t hat t he seat can no longer be lift ed by pulling it up.
Push t he lever f ig. 54 and fold t he backrest back int o posit ion. Check for
yourself t hat t he seat backrest is engaged.
Take t he belt t ongue out of t he safet y holder.
Close t he guide loop of t he seat belt on t he side of t he out er seat s unt il it is

heard t o lock.
The belt locks and t he belt s must be in t heir original posit ion af t er f olding
back t he seat cushions and t he seat backrest s - t hey must be ready t o use.
Moving seat s in crossw ise direct ion

Remove t he middle seat page 68.
Fold t he out er seat forwards p age 67 and lock it f ig. 52.
WARNING
Fig. 53 Locking t he seat
Locking seat s and f olding back int o posit ion
The seat backrest s must be securely int erlocked in posit ion so t hat no object s in t he luggage compart ment can slide f orw ards if t here is sudden braking - risk of injury!
When f olding t he seat backrest alw ays make sure t hat it has saf ely locked
int o posit ion, t his is conf irmed by t he posit ion and a visible marking on t he
cover of t he lever.
Not e
The seat belt s of t he out er seat s must always be guided t hrough t he guide loops
next t o t he head rest raint s. Ot herw ise t he seat belt s can slip behind t he seat .
Folding t able on t he middle seat backrest
Seat heat ing of t he f ront seat s
Fig. 56 Dash panel: Regulat or f or f ront

seat heat ing
Fig. 55 Rear seat s: Armrest
The middle seat backrest can be folded page 67, Folding rear seat s forw ards
forw ards and used as armrest or t able wit h cup holder f ig. 55.
You can elect rically heat t he seat cushions and t he seat backrest s of t he front
seat s.
You can place t wo cups or beverage cans int o t he recesses.
Front seat s
Do not place any hot beverages int o t he cup holder. If t he vehicle moves,
You can swit ch on and regulat e t he seat heat ing of t he driver or front passenger seat by pressing t he surface of t he regulat or at t he point at w hich t he
symbol is locat ed f ig. 56.
Wit h one press, you can swit ch t he heat ing t o highest int ensit y - 3rd st age,
w hich is indicat ed by t he light ing up of t he t hree warning light s in t he sw it ch.
Wit h repeat ed pressing of t he swit ch, t he int ensit y of t he heat ing is dow nregulat ed up t o t he swit ch-off. The int ensit y of t he heat ing is indicat ed by t he
number of illuminat ed w arning light s in t he sw it ch.
WARNING
CAUTION
Do not open t he beverages in t he cup holder while driving. There is a risk of spilling e.g. w hen braking and t herefore t he elect rical component s or t he seat upholst ery can be damaged.
WARNING
Not e
If t he middle rear seat backrest should be folded forward for lengt hy periods, t hen
make sure t hat t he belt locks are not locat ed below it - t his can result in permanent damage t o t he upholst ery.
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
69
Driving Tips
If , as an occupant , you have a subdued pain and/ or t emperat ure sensit ivit y,
e.g. t hrough medicat ion, paralysis or because of chronic illness (e.g. diabet es),
w e recommend not t o use t he seat heat ing. This can lead t o burns on t he
back, t he post erior and t he legs w hich are dif f icult t o heal. If t he seat heat ing
is used, w e recommend t o make regular breaks in your journey w hen driving
long dist ances, so t hat in specif ic cases as ment ioned above t he body can recuperat e from t he st ress of t he journey. Please consult your doct or, w ho can
evaluat e your specif ic condit ion.
Technical dat a
70

CAUTION
You should not kneel on t he seat s or ot herwise apply pressure at specific

point s in order t o avoid damaging t he heat ing element s of t he seat heat ers.
Do not use t he seat heat ing if t he seat s are not occupied by persons or if object s are fast ened or st ored on t hem, for example a child seat , a bag et c. A fault of
t he heat ing element s in t he seat heat ing can occur.
Dist ribut e t he it ems of luggage as evenly as possible.
Place heavy object s as far forward as possible.
At t ach t he it ems of luggage t o t he lashing eyes or t he fixing net page 71.
In t he event of an accident , t here is such a high kinet ic energy w hich is produced

by small and light object s t hat t hey can cause severe injuries. The magnit ude of
t he kinet ic energy depends on t he speed at w hich t he vehicle is t ravelling and on
t he w eight of t he object . The speed at w hich t he vehicle is t ravelling is in t his case
t he more significant fact or.
Do not clean t he seat s moist p age 184.
Not e
The seat heat ing should only be swit ched on when t he engine is running. This
has a significant effect of saving on t he bat t ery capacit y.
If t he on-board volt age drops, t he seat heat ing is sw it ched off aut omat ically,
in order t o provide sufficient elect rical energy for t he engine cont rol.
Example: In t he event of a front al collision at a speed of 50 km/ h, an unsecured

object wit h a weight of 4.5 kg produces an energy, which corresponds t o 20 t imes
it s ow n weight . This means t hat it result s in a weight of approx. 90 kg. You can
imagine t he injuries t hat can occur, if t his bullet is flying t hrough t he int erior
compart ment and hit s an occupant .
Pedals
WARNING
St ore t he object s in t he luggage compart ment and at t ach t hem t o t he
lashing eyes.
Concerning a secure depressing of t he pedal, you should use only foot mat s from
t he KODA Original Accessories.
Loose object s in t he passenger compart ment can be t hrow n f orw ard during a sudden manoeuvre or in case of an accident and can injure t he occupant s
or ot her oncoming t raf f ic. This risk is st ill increased, if t he object s w hich are
flying around are hit by a deployed airbag. In t his case, t he object s w hich are
t hrow n back can injure t he occupant s - hazard.
Operat ion of t he pedals must not be hindered!
WARNING
Great er pedal dist ances may be needed w hen t here is a f ault in t he brake
syst em.
Please not e t hat t he handling propert ies of your vehicle may be af f ect ed
when t ransport ing heavy object s as a result of t he displacement of t he cent re
of gravit y. The speed and st yle of driving must be adjust ed accordingly.
Do not place any f oot mat s or ot her addit ional f loor coverings in t he area of
t he pedals in order t o ensure t hat all t he pedals can be f ully depressed and are
able t o ret urn unobst ruct ed t o t heir init ial posit ion - risk of accident !
There must be no object s on t he f loor w hich could roll under t he pedals.
You w ould t hen no longer be able t o apply t he brakes, operat e t he clut ch or
accelerat or - risk of accident !
luggage compart ment

Loading t he luggage compart ment
Please observe t he following in t he int erest of having good handling charact erist ics of your vehicle:
The it ems carried in t he luggage compart ment should be st ored in such a

way t hat no object s are able t o slip f orw ard if t here are any sudden driving or
braking manoeuvres undert aken - risk of injury!
Never drive w it h t he boot lid f ully opened or slight ly ajar ot herw ise exhaust gases may get int o t he int erior of t he vehicle - risk of poisoning!
On no account exceed t he permissible axle loads and t he permissible gross
weight of t he vehicle - risk of accident !
Never t ransport occupant s in t he luggage compart ment !
CAUTION
Please ensure t hat t he heat ing element s of t he rear w indow heater are not dam
aged as a result of object s sliding in t his area.

Not e
WARNING
Tyre pressure must be adjust ed t o t he load page 201.
Vehicles of cat egory N1

On vehicles of t he cat egory N1, w hich are not fit t ed w it h a prot ect ive grille, a lashing set w hich complies w it h t he st andard EN 12195 (1 - 4) must be used for fast ening t he load.
Fast ening element s
The load t o be t ransport ed must be fixed in place in such a w ay t hat it cannot move during t he journey and w hen braking.
If t he it ems of luggage or object s are at t ached t o t he lashing eyes w it h unsuit able or damaged lashing st raps, injuries can occur in t he event of braking
manoeuvres or accident s. In order t o prevent t he it ems of luggage being
t hrow n f orw ard, alw ays use suit able lashing st raps w hich are f irmly at t ached
t o t he lashing eyes.
Folding hooks
Fig. 57 Luggage compart ment : Lashing eyes and fast ening element s/ at t achment point s and
fast ening st rip
Fixing eyes and fast ening element s f ig. 57 or fixing eyes and a fast ening st rip
are fit t ed on bot h sides of t he luggage compart ment f ig. 57 - right .
You can also at t ach t he fixing net s for st owing small it ems of luggage, in t he luggage compart ment on t he fixing eyes and fast ening element s or on t he fixing
eyes and t he fast ening st rip w it h int egrat ed hook f ig. 57.
Fig. 58 Luggage compart ment : f olding

hooks
Folding hooks for at t aching small it ems of luggage, such as bags et c., are provided
on bot h sides of t he luggage compart ment f ig. 58.
An it em of luggage weighing up t o 7.5 kg can be at t ached t o t he hook.
WARNING
Please ref er t o t he f ollow ing guidelines p age 70.
The fixing net s and t he inst allat ion inst ruction are locat ed in t he luggage compart ment .
Using t he syst em
71
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Technical dat a
72
Fast ening st rip w it h moveable hook
Fixing net s - Net programme
Fig. 59 Luggage compart ment : Fast ening st rip wit h moveable hook/ remove hook
Fig. 60 Fixing net : double horizont al pocket , f loor f ixing net / double vert ical pocket
A fast ening st rip is locat ed on bot h sides of t he luggage compart ment w it h t w o

moveable hooks each, in order t o at t ach small it ems of luggage, such as bags et c.
f ig. 59. An it em of luggage w eighing up t o 7.5 kg can be at t ached to each hook.
Fixing examples of t he fixing net as double horizont al pocket , floor fixing net
f ig. 60 - left , and double vert ical pocket f ig. 60 - right .
The fixing net s and t he inst allat ion inst ruct ion are locat ed in t he luggage compart ment .
Move t he hook int o anot her posit ion

Fold up t he hook in direct ion of arrow 1 f ig. 59 unt il an angle of approx. 45
is reached.
WARNING
The st rengt h of t he net makes it possible t o load t he pocket w it h object s
of up t o 1.5 kg in w eight . Heavy object s are not secured suf f icient ly - risk of
injury and net damage!
Move t he hook in direct ion of arrow 2 f ig. 59 int o t he desired posit ion and
fold down t he hook as far as t he st op in direct ion of arrow 3 .
Remove t he hook from t he f ast ening st rip

Fold t he hook in direct ion of arrow 4 unt il it slackens.
The load t o be t ransport ed must be f ixed in place in such a w ay t hat it cannot move during t he journey and w hen braking.
Inst all t he hook on t he f ast ening st rip

Posit ion t he hook on the fast ening st rip in t he vert ical posit ion in direct ion of
arrow 5 and light ly press it on.
CAUTION
Do not place any objects w it h sharp edges in t he net s - risk of net damage.
Fold t he hook down in opposit e direct ion of t he arrow 4 unt il it locks fully.
WARNING
Please ref er t o t he f ollow ing guidelines p age 70.
The luggage compart ment cover
73
WARNING
You can use t he luggage compart ment cover behind t he head rest raints for st oring light and soft it ems.
No object s should be placed on t he luggage compart ment cover, t he vehicle

occupant s could be endangered if t here is sudden braking or t he vehicle collides w it h somet hing.
CAUTION
Please ensure t hat t he heat ing wire of t he rear window heat er is not damaged as
a result of object s placed in t his area.
Not e
Opening t he t ailgat e also lift s up t he luggage compart ment cover.
Fig. 61 Removing t he luggage compart ment cover
St at ic separat ion net
The luggage compart ment cover can be removed as required if one must t ransport bulky goods.
Removing t he luggage compart ment cover
Fold t he seat backrest s a lit t le forw ard in order t o facilit at e t he removal of t he

luggage compart ment cover.
Unhook t he support st raps 1 f ig. 61.
Place t he cover in t he horizont al posit ion.
Pull t he luggage compart ment cover out of t he holders 2 t o t he rear or press

on t he bot t om side of t he luggage compart ment cover in t he front area.
Fold t he slackened front part of t he luggage compart ment cover over t he head
rest raint s of t he rear seat s.
Slight ly t ilt t he luggage compart ment cover and remove it t o t he rear.
Inst all again by pushing t he luggage compart ment cover forwards int o t he
holder 2 and hanging t he support st raps 1 on t he boot lid.
You can st ow t he removed luggage compart ment cover behind the rear seat backrest .
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Fig. 62 Use of t he st at ic separat ion net behind t he rear seat s/ behind t he front seat s
Inst all t he st at ic separat ion net behind t he front seat s or t he rear seat s.
Inst all t he st at ic separat ion net behind t he rear seat s
Remove t he luggage compart ment cover p age 73.
Take t he separat ion net out of t he bag.
Unfold bot h part s of t he cross rod unt il t hey are heard t o engage.
Insert t he cross rod int o t he mount B f ig. 62 first on t he one side and push
t he cross rod forward. In t he same way, fix t he cross rod t o t he ot her side of
t he vehicle, mount B .
Hang t he carabines C at t he ends of t he st rap int o t he fixing eyes behind t he
rear or front seat s.
Technical dat a
74

Pull t he st rap t hrough t he t ensioning clasp, first of all on t he one side and
t hen on t he ot her side.
The variable loading floor makes it easier t o handle bulky goods and creat es an
even luggage compart ment floor w hen t he rear seat backrest s are folded forw ard.
The maximum permissible surface load of t he variable loading floor is 75 kg.
Remove t he st at ic separat ion net behind t he rear seat s
Slacken t he bands on bot h sides and t ake off t he carabines C f ig. 62.
Push t he cross rod first of all on t he one side and t hen on t he ot her side t owards t he rear.
Take t he cross rod out of t he mount s B .
Removing t he variable loading f loor
Pack st at ic separat ion net

Press t he red but t on of t he joint A - so t hat it releases.
Put t he separat ion net folded t oget her in t he bag and close it .
At t ach t he bag wit h t he aid of t he plast ic carabines t o t he eyes on t he left and

right luggage compart ment t rim panel.
Variable loading floor in t he luggage compart ment

Remove variable loading f loor
Fig. 63 Luggage compart ment : Fold up variable loading f loor/ remove
You can fold t oget her t he loading floor by moving it in direct ion of arrow 1
f ig. 63.
Raise t he variable loading floor in direct ion of arrow 2 f ig. 63.
Pull on bot h sides of t he locking levers in direct ion of arrow 3 f ig. 63.
Pull t he variable loading floor up and out in direct ion of arrow 4 .
The inst allat ion of the variable loading floor is carried out in t he reverse order.
Secure t he variable loading f loor in t he raised posit ion

Fold up t he hooks on t he fast ening st rip in direct ion of arrow 1 f ig. 59.
Inst alling and removing t he st at ic separat ion net behind t he rear seat s wit h variable loading floor p age 74 is carried out analogously as behind t he rear seat s
w it hout variable loading floor. Use t he lower fixing eyes on t he carrier rails in order t o at t ach t he carabines.
The opening D f ig. 62 in t he separat ion net is designed t o feed t hrough t he
t hree-point seat belt p age 135.
Fold up t he variable loading floor behind t he seat backrest s of t he rear seat s.
Fold down t he hooks in direct ion of arrow 3 as far as t he st op f ig. 59.
Support t he variable loading floor on t he hooks folded downwards.
WARNING
Pay at t ent ion w hen inst alling t he variable loading f loor t hat t he carrier rails
and t he variable loading f loor are correct ly fixed, ot herw ise t he occupant s are
at risk.
Not e
If t he variable loading floor is inst alled, no flexible st orage compart ment can be in
st alled.
75
Variable loading floor w it h spare w heel
Remove carrier rails
Use variable loading f loor
Fig. 64 Luggage compart ment : Slacken check point s/ remove carrier rails
Remove carrier rails
Slacken t he check point s B f ig. 64 on t he carrier rails using t he vehicle key

or a flat screw driver.
Grasp t he carrier rail A at t he posit ion 1 and slacken it by pulling in t he direct ion of t he arrow .
Grasp t he carrier rail A at t he posit ion 2 , slacken it by pulling in t he direct ion

of t he arrow and t ake it out .
The carrier rail on t he ot her side of t he luggage compart ment can be removed
in t he same way.
Fig. 65 Luggage compart ment : Fold t he side part s of t he loading f loor/ example f or using t he
variable loading f loor
The variable loading floor makes it easier t o handle bulky goods and creat es an
even luggage compart ment floor w hen t he rear seat backrest s are folded forward.
The maximum permissible surface load of t he variable loading floor is 75 kg.
You can fold dow n the side part s of t he variable loading floor in direct ion of arrow
in order t o enlarge the space foreseen for st ow ing it ems of luggage f ig. 65.
Not e
If t he variable loading floor wit h spare wheel is inst alled, no flexible st orage
compart ment can be inst alled.
Inst all carrier rails
Posit ion t he carrier rails on t he sides of t he luggage compartment .
Press bot h check point s on each carrier rail up t o t he st op.
Check t he at t achment of t he carrier rails by pulling it .
The variable loading floor wit h spare w heel can be secured in t he raised posit ion in t he same w ay as t he variable loading floor w it hout spare w heel page 74,
Secure t he variable loading floor in t he raised posit ion.
WARNING
Pay at t ent ion w hen inst alling t hat t he carrier rails and t he variable loading
f loor are correct ly f ixed, ot herw ise t he occupant s are at risk.
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Technical dat a
76
Removable st orage box
CAUTION
Only use roof racks approved by KODA.
If you use ot her roof rack syst ems or if t he roof bars are not properly fit t ed,
t hen any damage which may result t o your car is not covered by t he w arrant y
agreement s. It is t herefore essent ial t o pay at t ent ion t o t he fit t ing inst ruct ions
supplied w it h t he roof luggage rack syst em.
On vehicles wit h a panorama roof, make sure t hat t he t ilt ed panorama roof
does not st rike any it ems w hich are t ransport ed.
Fig. 66 Luggage compart ment : St orage

box
Ensure t hat t he opened boot lid does not collide w it h t he roof load.

The increased aerodynamic drag result s in a higher fuel consumpt ion.
The st orage box A is housed under t he variable loading floor. If necessary, you
can remove it .
Roof load
There is a space for t he vehicle t ool kit under the st orage box p age 208.
Dist ribut e t he weight evenly over t he roof luggage rack syst em. The maximum
permissible roof load (including roof rack syst em) of 10 0 kg and t he maximum permissible t ot al weight of t he vehicle should not be exceeded.
WARNING
The removable st orage box must be locat ed under t he variable loading f loor
for t he saf e use of t he variable loading f loor.
Roof rack
You cannot make full use of t he permissible roof load if you use a roof luggage
rack syst em w it h a low er load carrying capacit y. The load t ransport ed on t he roof
luggage rack syst em must not exceed t he weight limit which is st at ed in t he fit t ing inst ruct ions.
WARNING
Roof rail
The it ems w hich you t ransport on t he roof bar syst em must be reliably at t ached - risk of accident !
You must on no account exceed t he permissible roof load, t he permissible
axle loads and t he permissible gross w eight of your vehicle - risk of accident !
Please not e t hat t he handling propert ies of your vehicle change w hen you
t ransport heavy or bulky it ems on t he roof bar syst em as a result of t he displacement of t he cent re of gravit y and t he increased w ind at t ack area - risk of
accident ! You must absolut ely adapt your st yle of driving and t he speed of t he
vehicle t o t he specif ic circumst ances.
Fig. 67 Roof rail
Cup holder
77
Cup holder in rear cent re console
Cup holder in f ront cent re console
Fig. 69 Cent re console at rear: Cup

holder
Fig. 68 Front cent re console: Cup holder
You can place t wo cups or beverage cans int o t he recesses f ig. 68.
WARNING
Driving Tips
Adjust t he cup holder by moving t he locking plat e B .
CAUTION
Saf et y
Using t he syst em
Press on t he panel in t he area A f ig. 69 - t he cup holder comes out .

Pull t he cup holder out as far as t he st op.
WARNING
Do not open t he beverages in t he cup holder while driving. There is a risk of spilling e.g. w hen braking and t herefore t he elect rical component s or t he seat upholst ery can be damaged.
CAUTION
The cup holder in t he rear part of t he cent re console must be closed (ot herw ise it could get damaged) before folding forward t he rear middle seat .
Do not open t he beverages in t he cup holder while driving. They may spill
w hen braking and while doing so damage t he vehicle.
Technical dat a
78
Not e holder
Replacing asht ray
Insert t he asht ray vert ically.
WARNING
Never lay f lammable object s in t he asht ray basin - risk of f ire!
Rear asht ray - low cent re console
Fig. 70 Windscreen: Not e holder
The parking t icket holder is designed e.g. for at t aching a car park t icket in parking
areas.
The at t ached not e has t o alw ays be removed before st art ing off in order not t o
rest rict t he driver's vision.
Fig. 72 Low cent re console: Rear asht ray
Asht ray
Opening asht ray
Front asht ray
Grasp t he asht ray cover at t he lower edge A and fold it open in t he direct ion
of arrow f ig. 72.
Removing asht ray

Grasp t he asht ray at t he handle B and pull it out in an upward direct ion.
Replacing asht ray
Insert t he asht ray int o t he console and press it in.
WARNING
Fig. 71 Cent re console: Front asht ray
Removing asht ray

Remove t he asht ray f ig. 71 upw ards. When removing do not hold t he asht ray
at t he cover - risk of breakage.
CAUTION
The asht ray in t he rear part of t he cent re console must be closed (ot herw ise it
could get damaged) before folding forward t he rear middle seat .
79
Cigaret t e light er, pow er socket s
Rear asht ray - high cent re console
Cigaret t e light er
You can also use the socket on t he cigaret t e light er for ot her elect rical appliances.
Fig. 73 High cent re console: Rear asht ray
Opening asht ray
Press on t he t op part of t he cover of t he asht ray in area A f ig. 73.
Removing asht ray insert

Press t he cover of t he asht ray down slight ly as far as t he st op.
Fig. 74 Cent re console: Cigaret t e light er
Using t he cigaret t e light er
Grasp t he asht ray insert at t he cover B and pull it out .
Insert asht ray insert

Insert t he asht ray insert int o t he mount and press it in.
WARNING
Press in t he but t on of t he cigaret t e light er f ig. 74.
Wait unt il t he but t on jumps forward.
Remove t he cigaret t e light er immediat ely and use it .
Insert t he cigaret t e light er again int o t he socket .
Using t he socket
CAUTION
The asht ray in t he rear part of t he cent re console must be closed (ot herwise it
could get damaged) before folding forw ard t he rear middle seat .
Remove t he cigaret t e light er or t he cover of t he power socket .
Connect t he plug of t he elect rical appliance t o t he socket .
The 12 volt pow er socket can also be used t o supply pow er t o addit ional elect rical
accessories wit h a pow er upt ake up t o 120 w at t s.
WARNING
Take care w hen using t he cigaret t e light er! Not paying proper at t ent ion or
incorrect use t he cigaret t e light er in an uncont rolled manner may result in
burns.
The cigaret t e light er and t he pow er socket also operat es w hen t he ignit ion
is sw it ched off or t he ignit ion key w it hdraw n. You should t heref ore never
leave children unat t ended in t he vehicle.

Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Technical dat a
80

CAUTION
St orage compart ment on t he front passenger side
Always use mat ching plugs t o avoid damaging t he pow er socket .
Not e
Connect ing elect rical component s w hen t he engine is not running w ill drain
t he bat t ery of t he vehicle - risk of bat t ery draining!
Furt her informat ion page 207, Accessories, changes and replacement of
part s.
Power socket in t he luggage compart ment
page 80
St orage compart ment on t he dash panel
p age 81
St owage compart ment in front cent re console
p age 82
St owage compart ment for spect acles
p age 82
St orage compart ment in t he front and rear doors
p age 82
St owage compart ment below front passenger seat
page 83
Front seat armrest w it h st owage compart ment
page 83
St owage compart ment in rear cent re console
page 84
St orage compart ment s in t he luggage compart ment
page 84
Flexible st orage compart ment
page 84
Clot hes hooks
p age 85
Through-loading bag
p age 85
WARNING
Please do not place anyt hing on t op of t he dash panel. Such object s might
slide or f all dow n w hen driving (w hen accelerat ing or cornering) and may dist ract you f rom concent rat ing on t he t raf f ic sit uat ion - risk of accident !
Fig. 75 Luggage compart ment : Power
socket
Open t he cover of t he pow er socket f ig. 75.
Connect t he plug of t he elect rical appliance t o t he socket .
Ensure t hat w hen driving no object s f rom t he cent re console of f rom ot her
st orage possibilit ies may get int o t he f oot w ell of t he driver. You w ould t hen
no longer be able t o apply t he brakes, operat e t he clut ch or accelerat or - risk
of accident !
St orage compart ment on t he front passenger side
You can only use t he power socket for t he connect ion of approved elect rical accessories w it h a pow er upt ake up t o 120 w at t s. The vehicle bat t ery will be discharged in t he process if the engine is st at ionary.
The same remarks apply here as for p age 79, Cigaret t e light er, power socket s.
Furt her informat ion p age 207, Accessories, changes and replacement of part s.
St orage compart ment s

Overview
You will find t he follow ing st orage facilit ies in your vehicle:
Fig. 76 Dash panel: St orage compart ment on t he f ront passenger side
St orage compart ment on t he dash panel
Opening and closing t he st orage compart ment on t he f ront passenger side
Press t he but t on f ig. 76 - t he lid folds down.
Raise t he lid and press it unt il t he cat ch is heard t o engage.
81
In t he st orage compart ment are pin holders.
WARNING
The st orage compart ment must alw ays be closed w hen driving f or saf et y reasons.
Fig. 78 Dash panel: St orage compart ment
Cooling of st orage compart ment on front passenger

side
Press on t he but t on f ig. 78 in direct ion of arrow , t he cover t hen folds upw ards.
Cert ain model versions are equipped w it hout lid for t he st orage compart ment .
WARNING
The st orage compart ment is not a subst it ut e f or t he asht ray and must also
not be used f or such purposes - risk of f ire!
The st orage compart ment must always be closed w hen driving f or saf et y
reasons.
Fig. 77 St orage compart ment : Using
cooling syst em
You can sw it ch on t he cooling syst em by pulling t he lever in direct ion of arrow

f ig. 77.
Swit ch off t he cooling syst em by insert ing t he lever.
Do not put any highly inf lammable object s or object s w hich are sensit ive t o
heat (e.g. light ers, sprays, spect acles, carbonat ed drinks) in t he st orage compart ment .
Opening t he air supply w hen t he air condit ioning syst em is sw it ched on allow s
cooled air t o flow int o t he st orage compart ment .
Opening t he air inlet when t he air condit ioning syst em is on causes fresh or int erior air t o flow int o t he st orage compart ment.
We recommend t hat you sw it ch off t he cooling if it is operat ing in t he heat ing
mode or if you are not using t he cooling syst em for t he st orage compart ment .
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Technical dat a
82
St ow age compart ment in front cent re console
CAUTION
The compart ment must only be opened when removing or insert ing t he spect acles and ot herwise must be kept closed.
Do not put any heat -sensit ive object s in t he st owage compartment - t hey may
be damaged.
On vehicles which are fit t ed w it h an ant i-t heft alarm syst em, t he opened st orage compart ment reduces t he effect iveness of t he sensors for t he int erior monit or.
St orage compart ment in t he front and rear doors
Fig. 79 Front cent re console: St orage

compart ment
The st orage compart ment wit hout cover in t he cent re console is foreseen for
st orage of small object s.
WARNING
Fig. 81 St orage compart ment in t he

f ront doors
St ow age compart ment for spect acles
A bot t le holder is locat ed in t he area B f ig. 81 of t he st orage compart ment for

t he front and rear doors.
WARNING
Use t he area A f ig. 81 of t he st orage compart ment only f or st oring object s
which do not project so t hat t he ef f ect iveness of t he side airbag is not impaired.
Fig. 80 Det ail of t he headliner: St ow age
compart ment f or spect acles
Press t he but t on A f ig. 80, t he st orage compart ment folds down.
St ow age compart ment below front passenger seat
83
Closing st ow age compart ment
Open t he lid up t o t he st op, t hen you can fold it downwards.
Set t ing height

First of all fold t he lid t o t he bot t om and lift it in t he direct ion of arrow int o one
of t he 4 fixed posit ions.
Adjust ing in f orw ard/ back direct ion
Push t he lid int o t he desired posit ion.
Opening air inlet
Pull t he lock A in upw ard direct ion.
Fig. 82 Front passenger seat : St orage

compart ment
Tilt t he lock t o open t he flap and pull out t he flap f ig. 82.
Tilt t he lock t o close t he flap and press flap close.
Closing air inlet

Push t he lock A as far as t he st op downwards.
On vehicles fit t ed wit h air condit ioning, t he st orage compart ment is equipped
w it h a lockable inlet for t hermally t reat ed (w armed-up) air.
CAUTION
The st orage compart ment is designed for st oring small object s of up t o 1.5 kg. in
weight .
Front seat armrest w it h st orage compart ment
At open air supply, air flows int o t he st orage wit h a t emperat ure w hich is as high
as t he one out of t he air out let nozzles, depending on t emperat ure set t ing.
The air inlet in t he st orage compart ment is connect ed t o posit ion t hrough adjust ment of t he cont rol dial for air dist ribut ion. This posit ion causes t he maximum
amount of air t o flow int o t he st orage compart ment (depending on t he rot ary regulat or posit ion for t he fan).
You can use t he st orage compart ment , for example, t o t emper drinks cans, et c.
If you do not use t he air inlet in t he st orage compart ment , t he end cover should
alw ays be kept closed.
Not e
Push t he lid of t he armrest up t o st op t o t he rear before operat ing t he handbrake.
Fig. 83 Armrest : St orage compart ment / cooling of st orage compart ment
The armrest is adjust able for height and lengt h.

Opening st ow age compart ment
Open t he lid of t he armrest in t he direct ion of arrow 1 f ig. 83.
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Technical dat a
84
St ow age compart ment in rear cent re console
St orage compart ment s are locat ed on bot h sides of t he luggage compart ment .
The removable st orage compart ment A f ig. 85 on t he left side is suit able for
st ow ing small object s weighing up t o 1.5 kg.
The st orage compart ment B f ig. 85 on t he right side is suit able for st owing
small object s w eighing up t o 0.5 kg.
Flexible st orage compart ment

Fig. 84 Cent re console at rear: St orage
compart ment
The st orage compart ment is equipped wit h a removable insert .
Open t he st orage compart ment by pulling on t he upper edge of the st orage

compart ment A in t he direct ion of arrow f ig. 84.
WARNING
Fig. 86 Flexible st orage compart ment
A flexible st orage compart ment is locat ed on t he right side of t he luggage compart ment .
CAUTION
The st orage compart ment in t he rear part of t he cent re console must be closed
(ot herwise it could get damaged) before folding forw ard t he rear middle seat .
St orage compart ment s in t he luggage compart ment
Removing
Take hold of t he flexible st orage compart ment at bot h upper corners.
Press t he upper corners t o t he inside and release t he st orage compart ment by

pulling upw ards.
Remove by pulling tow ards you.
Inst all
Insert bot h ends of t he flexible st orage compart ment int o t he openings of t he
right side t rim panel of t he luggage compart ment and push it dow nw ards unt il
it locks.
CAUTION
The st orage compart ment is designed for st oring small object s wit h a maximum
t ot al weight of 8 kg.
Fig. 85 Luggage compart ment : St orage compart ment s
Removable t hrough-loading bag
85
WARNING
The removable t hrough-loading bag is solely used for t ransport ing

skis.
Aft er placing t he skis int o t he removable t hrough-loading bag, you must

secure it w it h t he securing belt A .
The securing belt must hold t he skis t ight .
Ensure t hat t he securing belt for skis grasps t he middle bet w een t he t ip
and t he heel element of t he binding (see also imprint on t he removable
t hrough-loading bag).
Not e
The removable through-loading bag is foreseen for t w o pairs of skis. The t ot al
w eight of t he skis which are t ransport ed must not exceed 10 kg.
Fig. 87 Securing t he removable
t hrough-loading bag
Loading
Open a rear side door of t he vehicle.
Fold t he backrest of t he middle seat forwards page 66.
Place t he empt y removable t hrough-loading bag in t he gap bet ween t he front

and rear seat s in such a way t hat t he end of t he bag wit h t he zip lies in t he
luggage compart ment .
Open t he boot lid/ luggage compart ment door.
Push t he skis int o t he removable t hrough-loading bag from t he luggage compart ment .
Close t he removable t hrough-loading bag wit h t he zip.
Securing
Pull t he securing belt wit h bot h lock t ongues out of t he pocket of t he removable t hrough-loading bag.
Insert t he lock t ongues A f ig. 87 in t he belt locks of t he rear middle seat

belt C , first of all on t he one side and t hen on t he ot her side.
Place t he securing belt in t he middle of t he skis bet ween t he heel and t he t ip

of t he bindings and pull t he securing belt t ight at t he free end of t he belt B .
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
You must put t he skis and t he st icks in t he removable t hrough-loading bag

w it h t he t ips facing t he rear.
If t here are several pairs of skis in t he removable t hrough-loading bag, ensure
t hat t he bindings are posit ioned at t he same height .
The removable through-loading bag must never be folded t oget her or st owed
w hen moist .
Clot hes hooks

The clot hes hooks are locat ed on t he middle pillar and on t he handle of t he headliner above each of t he rear doors.
WARNING
Ensure t hat any clot hes hanging f rom t he hooks do not impair your vision
t o t he rear.
Use t he hooks f or hanging only light it ems of clot hing and ensure t hat
t here are no heavy or sharp-edged object s in t he pocket s.
The maximum permissible load of t he hooks is 2 kg.
Do not use clot hes hangers f or hanging up it ems of clot hing ot herw ise t his
w ill int erf ere w it h t he prot ect ion of f ered by t he head airbag.
Technical dat a
86
Heat ing and air condit ioning syst em

Int roduct ion
Descript ion and inf ormat ion
The heat ing effect is dependent upon t he coolant t emperat ure, t hus full heat out put only occurs w hen t he engine has reached it s operat ing t emperat ure.
If t he cooling syst em is swit ched on, t he t emperat ure and air humidit y drops in
t he vehicle. The well-being of t he occupant s of t he car is enhanced as a result of
t his part icularly at high out side t emperat ures and a high air humidit y. The syst em
prevent s t he w indows mist ing up during t he cold season of t he year.
It is possible t o briefly activat e recirculat ed air mode in order t o enhance t he cooling effect - air-condit ioning syst em p age 89, Climat ronic p age 92.
The air inlet in front of t he w indscreen must be free of ice, snow or leaves in order
t o ensure t hat t he heat ing and cooling syst ems operat e properly.
Aft er sw it ching on t he cooling Condensat ion from t he evaporat or of t he air condit ioning may drip down and form a puddle below t he vehicle. This is quit e normal
and not an indicat ion of a leak!
WARNING
For your ow n saf et y and t hat of ot her road users, ensure t hat all t he w indows are f ree of ice, snow and mist ing. Please familiarize yourself about how
t o correct ly operat e t he heat ing and vent ilat ion syst ems, how t o demist and
defrost t he w indow s, as w ell as w it h t he cooling mode.
You should not leave recirculat ed air mode on over a longer period of t ime,
as st ale air may result in f at igue in t he driver and occupant s, divert your at t ent ion and also cause t he w indow s t o mist up. The risk of having an accident
increases. Sw it ch recirculat ed air mode of f as soon as t he w indow s begin
mist ing up.
Not e
The used air st reams out t hrough t he air removal openings in t he luggage
compart ment .
We recommend t hat you do not smoke in t he vehicle when t he recirculat ing air
mode is operat ing since t he smoke w hich is draw n at t he evaporat or from t he int erior of t he vehicle forms deposit s in t he evaporat or of t he air condit ioning sys-
t em. This produces a permanent odour w hen t he air condit ioning syst em is operat ing which can only be eliminat ed t hrough considerable effort and expense (replacement of compressor).
Please refer t o t he informat ion regarding t he recirculat ed air mode for heat ing
page 89 and/ or for air-condit ioning syst em page 89 or Climat ronic
page 92.
To ensure t hat t he heat ing and air conditioning syst ems w ork properly, do not
block up t he air out let vent s wit h any object s.
Using t he air condit ioning syst em economically

The compressor on t he air condit ioning syst em uses power from t he engine w hen
in cooling mode which will effect t he fuel consumpt ion.
It recommended t o open t he window s or t he doors of a vehicle for w hich t he int erior has been st rongly heat ed t hrough t he effect of direct sunlight in order t o allow t he heat ed air t o escape.
The cooling syst em should not be swit ched on while t ravelling w hen t he window
is open.
The desired int erior t emperat ure can also be achieved w it hout swit ching in t he
cooling syst em just by sw it ching t o fresh air mode.

When you economize on fuel, you also reduce pollut ant emissions.
Operat ional problems

If t he cooling syst em does not operat e at out side t emperat ures higher t han +5 C,
t here is a problem in t he syst em. The reasons for t his may be:
The fuse on t he air condit ioning syst em has blown. Check t he fuse, replace it if
necessary page 220.
The cooling syst em has swit ched off aut omat ically for a short t ime because
t he coolant t emperat ure of t he engine is t oo hot page 11.
If you are not able t o rect ify t he operat ional problem yourself, or if t he cooling capacit y decreases, swit ch t he cooling syst em off. Cont act a specialist garage.
Air out let vent s
87
Close air out let vent s 6
Turn t he vert ical wheel int o t he end posit ion.
Change air f low of air out let vent s 3 and 4

In order t o change t he st rengt h of t he air flow , swivel t he horizont al lamellas
w it h t he aid of t he moveable adjust er.
In order t o change t he lat eral direct ion of t he air flow , t urn t he vert ical lamellas w it h t he aid of t he moveable adjust er.
Change air f low of air out let vent s 6
In order t o change t he st rengt h of t he air flow , swivel t he horizont al lamellas

w it h t he aid of t he vert ical wheel upwards or dow nw ards.
In order t o change t he lat eral direct ion of t he air flow , t urn t he vert ical lamellas w it h t he aid of t he horizont al w heel t o t he left or t o t he right .
The air out let vent s 3, 4 f ig. 88 and 6 f ig. 89 can be closed and opened individually.
Fig. 88 Air vent s at t he front
The air out let vent s 6 are only fit t ed on vehicles w it h higher cent re console.
Warmed, unw armed or cooled air w ill flow out of t he air out let vent s according t o
t he set t ing of t he regulat or of t he heat ing or t he air condit ioning syst em and t he
at mospheric condit ions.
Fig. 89 Air vent s at t he rear
Open t he air out let vent s 3 and 4

Turn t he horizont al wheel (t o t he right ) f ig. 88.
Open t he air out let vent s 6
Turn t he vert ical wheel (bet ween t he end posit ions) f ig. 89.
Close air out let vent s 3 and 4
Turn t he horizont al wheel int o t he end posit ion (t o t he left ).
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Technical dat a
88
Heat ing
Turn t he blow er swit ch B int o posit ion 0 in order t o sw it ch t he blower off.
If you w ish t o shut off t he fresh air supply, use t he but t on 1 - recirculat ed air
mode in Recirculat ed air mode on page 89.
Using t he syst em
Cont rol f or air dist ribut ion

You can adjust t he direct ion of t he inlet air flow page 87 using air dist ribut ion regulat or C .
The heat ing syst em delivers air int o t he int erior of the vehicle and
warms it as required.

Press but t on 2 . Furt her informat ion page 53, Windscreen and rear w indow
heat er.
Auxiliary heat ing (auxiliary heat ing)
Press t he but t on 3 in order t o direct ly swit ch on/ off t he auxiliary heat ing
(auxiliary heat ing and vent ilat ion). Furt her informat ion page 95, Auxiliary
heat ing (auxiliary heat ing and vent ilat ion).
All cont rols apart from t he cont rol dial B can be set t o any desired int ermediat e
posit ion.
The blower should alw ays be on t o prevent the w indows from mist ing up.
Fig. 90 Heat ing: Cont rol element s
Not e
If t he air dist ribut ion is posit ioned t owards t he window s, t he t ot al amount of air is
used t o defrost t he w indows and t hus no air w ill be fed t o t he foot w ell. This can
lead t o rest rict ion of t he heat ing comfort .
Set t ing t emperat ure
Turn t he cont rol dial A f ig. 90 t o t he right in order t o increase t he t emperat ure.
Turn t he cont rol dial A t o t he left in order t o increase t he t emperat ure.
Cont rolling blow er

Turn t he blower sw it ch B int o one of t he posit ions, 1 t o 4, in order t o swit ch
t he blower on.
Set heat ing

Recommended basic set t ings of heat ing cont rols for:

Set t ing of t he cont rol dial
Set -up
Defrost ing t he windscreen and side

window s
To t he right up t o t he
st op
Free w indscreen and side w indows

from mist
Desired t emperat ure
2 or 3
The fast est heat ing
To t he right up t o t he
st op
Comfort able heat ing
2 or 3
Fresh air mode - vent ilat ion
To t he left up t o t he
st op
Desired posit ion
Not e
Cont rols A , B , C and t he but t on 1 f ig. 90.
Air out let vent s 4 f ig. 88.
But t on 1
Air out let vent s 4
Do not sw it ch on
Open and align w it h t he side w indow
Do not sw it ch on
Open and align w it h t he side w indow
Briefly swit ched on
Opening
Do not sw it ch on
Opening
Do not sw it ch on
Opening
89
WARNING
We recommend t hat you leave t he air out let vent s 3 f ig. 88 in t he opened
posit ion.
You should not leave recirculat ed air mode on over a longer period of t ime, as
st ale air may result in f at igue in t he driver and occupant s, divert your at t ent ion and also cause t he w indow s t o mist up. The risk of having an accident increases. Sw it ch recirculat ed air mode of f as soon as t he w indow s begin mist ing up.
Recirculat ed air mode

In recirculat ed air mode air is sucked out of t he int erior of t he vehicle and t hen fed back into t he int erior.
Air condit ioning syst em (manual air condit ioning

syst em)
Recirculat ed air mode prevent s pollut ed air out side t he vehicle from get t ing int o
t he vehicle, for example when driving t hrough a t unnel or w hen st anding in a t raffic jam.
Descript ion
Sw it ching recirculat ed air mode on

Press t he but t on - t he warning light light s up in t he but t on f ig. 90.
Sw it ching recirculat ed air mode of f
Press again t he but t on - t he warning light in t he but t on goes out .
The recirculat ed air mode is swit ched off aut omat ically if t he air dist ribut ion cont rol C is in posit ion f ig. 90. You can also sw it ch recirculat ed air mode on
again from t his set t ing by repeat edly pressing pushbut t on .
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
The air condit ioning syst em is a combined cooling and heat ing syst em. It makes it possible t o optimally cont rol t he air t emperat ure at
any season of t he year.
Descript ion of t he air condit ioning syst em
It is import ant for your safet y and for your driving comfort t hat t he air condit ioning
syst em is operat ing properly.
Technical dat a
90
The cooling only operat es if but t on AC f ig. 91 1 is pressed, and t he follow ing
condit ions are met :
engine running,
out side t emperat ure above approx. +2 C and
blow er sw it ch swit ched on (posit ions 1 t o 4).
4 - recirculat ed
You can adjust t he direct ion of t he inlet air flow page 87 using air dist ribut ion regulat or C .
swit ching cooling on and of f

Press t he but t on AC 1 f ig. 91. The w arning light light s up in t he but t on.
Not e
Using t he syst em
Turn t he blow er swit ch B int o posit ion 0 in order t o sw it ch t he blower off.

If you w ish t o shut off t he fresh air supply, use t he but t on
air mode p age 91.
Cont rol f or air dist ribut ion
Air at a t emperat ure of about 5 C may flow out of t he vent s under cert ain circumst ances when t he cooling syst em is operat ing. Lengt hy and uneven dist ribut ion of
t he air flow out of t he vent s and large differences in t emperat ure, for example
w hen get t ing out of t he vehicle, can result in chills in sensit ive persons.
We recommend t hat you have t he air condit ioning syst em cleaned by a specialist garage once every year.
When you again press t he swit ch AC , t he cooling syst em is swit ched off. The
w arning light in t he but t on goes out .
Press but t on
dow heat er.
2 . Furt her informat ion page 53, Windscreen and rear w in-

Press t he but t on 3 in order t o direct ly sw it ch on/ off t he auxiliary heat ing
(auxiliary heat ing and vent ilat ion. Furt her informat ion p age 95, Auxiliary
heat ing (auxiliary heat ing and vent ilat ion).
Not e
The w hole heat out put w ill be needed t o defrost t he windshield and side w indows. No warm air w ill be fed t o t he foot well. This can lead t o rest rict ion of t he
heat ing comfort .
The w arning light AC light s aft er act ivat ion, even if not all of the condit ions for
t he funct ion of t he cooling syst em have been met . As a result , t he readiness for
cooling is signalled when all condit ions are sat isfied p age 89, Descript ion of t he
air condit ioning syst em.

Fig. 91 The air condit ioning syst em: Cont rol element s

Turn t he cont rol dial A f ig. 91 t o t he right in order t o increase t he t emperat ure.
Turn t he cont rol dial A t o t he left in order t o increase t he t emperat ure.

Turn t he blower sw it ch B int o one of t he posit ions, 1 t o 4, in order t o swit ch
t he blower on.
91
Set t ing air condit ioning syst em

Recommended basic set t ings of t he cont rol element s of t he air condit ioning syst em for t he respect ive operat ing modes:
Set t ing of t he cont rol dial
Set -up
But t on
Defrost windscreen and side

window s - free from mist a)
3 or 4
The fast est heat ing
To t he right up t o
t he st op
Comfort able heat ing
2 or 3
The fast est cooling
To t he left up t o
t he st op
briefly 4, t hen
2 or 3
Opt imal cooling
1, 2 or 3
Fresh air mode - vent ilat ion
To t he left up t o
t he st op
Desired posit ion
Air out let vent s 4
Is act ivat ed aut omat icallyb)
Do not sw it ch on
Open and align w it h t he side

window
Swit ched off
Opening
Swit ched off
Do not sw it ch on
Opening
Act ivat ed
Opening
Act ivat ed
Do not sw it ch on
Open and align t o t he roof
Swit ched off
Do not sw it ch on
Opening
a)
In count ries with high humidity, w e recommend you do not use t his set t ing. This can result in heavy cooling of t he window glass and t he following fogging from out side.
b)
The warning light in t he 1 but t on lights aft er act ivat ion, even if not all of t he conditions for t he funct ion of the cooling syst em have been met . As a result , t he readiness for cooling is signalled w hen all condit ions
are sat isfied page 89, Description of t he air condit ioning syst em.
Not e
Cont rols A , B , C and t he 1 but t on and 4 f ig. 91.
Air out let vent s 4 f ig. 88.
Sw it ching recirculat ed air mode off

Press again t he but t on - t he w arning light in t he but t on goes out .
We recommend t hat you leave t he air out let vent s 3 f ig. 88 in t he opened
posit ion.
Press t he but t on
4 f ig. 91 t he warning light light s up in t he but t on.
The recirculat ed air mode is sw it ched off aut omat ically if t he air dist ribut ion cont rol C is in posit ion f ig. 91. You can also sw it ch recirculat ed air mode on
again from t his set t ing by repeat edly pressing pushbut t on .

In recirculat ed air mode air is sucked out of t he int erior of t he vehicle and t hen fed back into t he int erior.
t he vehicle, for example when driving t hrough a t unnel or w hen st anding in a t raffic jam.
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Technical dat a
92

Not e
WARNING
We recommend t hat you have Climat ronic cleaned by a specialist garage once
every year.
On vehicles equipped wit h a fact ory-fit t ed radio or radio navigat ion syst em,
t he informat ion of t he Climat ronic is also shown on t he display. This funct ion can
be sw it ched off, see operat ing inst ruct ions of t he radio or t he radio navigat ion
syst em.
Climat ronic (aut omat ic air condit ioning)
Overview of t he cont rol element s
Descript ion
The cont rols enable a separat e sett ing of t he t emperat ure for t he
left and right side.
The Climat ronic syst em is an aut omatic heat ing, fresh air and cooling syst em which provides opt imal comfort for t he occupant s of t he
car.
The Climat ronic maint ains fully aut omat ically a convenience t emperat ure. This is
achieved by aut omat ically varying t he t emperat ure of t he out -flowing air, t he
blower st ages and t he air dist ribut ion. The system also t akes int o account sunlight which eliminat es t he need t o alt er t he set t ings manually. The aut omat ic
mode p age 93 ensures maximum well-being of t he occupant s at all t imes of
t he year.
Descript ion of Climat ronic syst em
The cooling operat es only if t he follow ing condit ions are met :
engine running,
out side t emperat ure above approx. +2 C,
AC sw it ched on.
The AC compressor is swit ched off at a high coolant t emperat ure in order t o ensure cooling of t he engine at high loads.
Recommended set t ing f or all periods of t he year:
Set t he desired t emperat ure, w e recommend 22 C.
Press t he but t on AUTO f ig. 92.
Move t he air out let vent s 3 and 4 f ig. 88 so t hat t he air flow is direct ed
slight ly upw ards.
Fig. 92 Climat ronic: Cont rol element s
The but t ons

1
2
3
4
5
6
Defrost w indscreen int ensively

Air flow t o t he w indow s
Air flow t o head
Air flow in t he footw ell
Recirculat ed air mode w it h air qualit y sensor
Rear window heat er

But t ons/ cont rol dial
When pressing again t he but t on AUTO , t he Climat ronic changes int o t he LOW
mode and t he warning light in t he t op left corner light s up. The Climat ronic uses
only in t his mode t he lower blower speed. How ever t aking int o account t he noise
level, t his is more comfort able, yet be aware t hat t he effect iveness of t he air condit ioning syst em is reduced part icularly if t he vehicle is fully occupied.
Set t ing of t he t emperat ure for t he left side, operat ion of t he seat heat ing of
t he left front seat
8 Aut omat ic mode AUTO
9 Sw it ching off Climat ronic OFF
10 Set t ing t he blower speed
11 Depending upon vehicle equipment : But t on for direct swit ching on/ off of auxiliary heat ing p age 95, or sw it ching on/ off of w indscreen heat er
page 53
12 Sw it ching on/ off of t he t emperat ure set t ing in dual mode DUAL
13 Sw it ching cooling on and off AC
14 Set t ing of t he t emperat ure for t he right side, operat ion of t he seat heat ing of
t he right front seat
7
By pressing again t he but t on AUTO , you change int o t he HIGH mode.

The aut omat ic mode is sw it ched off by pressing t he but t on for t he air dist ribut ion
or increasing or decreasing t he blow er speed. The t emperat ure is nevert heless
regulat ed.
Aut omat ic mode
sw it ching cooling on and of f
Press t he but t on AC f ig. 92. The w arning light light s up in t he but t on.
When you again press t he sw it ch AC , t he cooling syst em is swit ched off. The
w arning light in t he but t on goes out . Only t he funct ion of t he vent ilat ion remains act ive when no low er t emperat ure t han t he out side t emperat ure can be
reached.
The aut omat ic mode is used in order to maint ain a const ant t emperature and t o demist t he windows in t he int erior of the car.
You can separat e t he int erior t emperat ure for t he left and right side separat ely.
You can set t he t emperat ure for bot h sides aft er sw it ching on t he ignit ion
w it h t he cont rol dial 7 f ig. 92.
If you wish t o set t he t emperat ure for t he right side, t urn the cont rol dial 14 .
The w arning light in t he but t on DUAL light s up, t his indicat es t hat differing
t emperat ures for t he left and right side can be set .
Sw it ching aut omat ic mode on
Set a t emperat ure bet w een +18 and +26 .
Move t he air out let vent s 3 and 4 f ig. 88, so t hat t he air flow is direct ed
slight ly upwards.
Press t he but t on AUTO . In t he right or left t op corner a warning light light s up,
depending on which unit was last select ed.
If t he warning light in t he t op right corner of t he but t on AUTO light s up, t he Climat ronic operat es in HIGH mode. The HIGH mode is t he st andard set t ing of t he
Climat ronic.
Using t he syst em
sw it ching cooling on and off
Not e
Below t he t op row of but t ons is locat ed t he int erior t emperat ure sensor. Do not
glue or cover over t he sensor, ot herwise it could have an unfavourable effect on
t he Climat ronic.
93
Saf et y
Driving Tips
If t he w arning light in t he but t on DUAL light s up, t he t emperat ure for bot h sides
cannot be set wit h t he cont rol dial 7 . You can reinit iat e t his funct ion by pressing
t he but t on DUAL . The w arning light in t he but t on w hich indicat es t he possibilit y t o
set differing t emperat ures for t he left and right side, goes out.
You can set t he int erior t emperat ure bet ween +18 C and +26 . The int erior t emperat ure is regulat ed aut omat ically w it hin t his range. If you chose a t emperat ure
lower t han +18 C, a blue symbol light s up at t he st art of t he numerical scale. If you
chose a t emperat ure higher t han +26 C, a red symbol light s up at t he end of t he
Technical dat a
94
numerical scale. In bot h limit posit ions t he Climat ronic operat es at maximum cooling or heat ing capacit y, respect ively. The t emperat ure is not cont rolled in t his
case.
Lengt hy and uneven dist ribut ion of t he air flow out of t he vent s (in part icular at
t he leg area) and large differences in t emperat ure, for example when get t ing out
of t he vehicle, can result in chills in sensit ive persons.
WARNING
Not e
In recirculat ed air mode air is sucked out of t he int erior of t he vehicle and t hen fed back int o t he int erior. When t he aut omatic air dist ribut ion cont rol is swit ched on, an air quality sensor measures t he
concent rat ion of pollut ant s in t he drawn in air.
t he vehicle, for example when driving t hrough a t unnel or when st anding in a t raffic jam. If a considerable increase in concent rat ion of pollut ant s is recognized by
t he air qualit y sensor, w hen t he aut omat ic air dist ribut ion cont rol is sw it ched on,
t he air dist ribut ion cont rol will t emporarily be swit ched off. If t he concent rat ion of
pollut ant s decreases t o t he normal level, t he air dist ribut ion cont rol is aut omat ically swit ched off so t hat fresh air can be guided int o t he vehicle int erior.
Press t he but t on repeat edly

but t on light s up.
unt il t he warning light on t he left side of t he
Sw it ch on aut omat ic air dist ribut ion cont rol

Press t he but t on repeat edly unt il t he warning light on t he right side of t he
but t on light s up.
Sw it ch off aut omat ic air dist ribut ion cont rol t emporarily
If t he air qualit y sensor does not swit ch on t he air dist ribut ion cont rol aut omat ically when t here is a nauseat ing smell, you can swit ch it on yourself by
pressing t he but t on . The warning light light s up in t he but t on on t he left
side.
Sw it ching recirculat ed air mode of f
Press t he but t on AUTO or press t he but t on
light s in t he but t on go out .
repet it ively, unt il t he warning
1 f ig. 92. Aft er t he wind-
The aut omat ic air dist ribut ion cont rol operat es only if t he out side t emperat ure
is higher t han approx. 2 C.

There are a t ot al of seven blower st ages available.
The Climat ronic syst em cont rols t he blow er st ages aut omat ically in line w it h t he
int erior t emperat ure. You can also, however, adapt t he blow er st ages manually t o
suit your part icular needs.
If t he w indscreen mist s up, press t he butt on

screen has been demisted, press t he but t on AUTO .
Press again t he but t on on t he left side (reduce blow er speed) or on t he

right side (increase blower speed).
If you swit ch off t he blow er, t he Climat ronic is sw it ched off.

The set blow er speed is displayed above t he but t on
ber of warning light s come on.
w hen t he respect ive num-
WARNING
St ale air may result in fat igue in t he driver and occupant s, reduce at t ent ion levels and also cause t he w indow s t o mist up. The risk of having an accident increases.
Do not sw it ch t he Climat ronic syst em off f or longer t han necessary.
Sw it ch t he Climat ronic syst em on as soon as t he w indow s mist up.
Defrost ing w indscreen
WARNING
The auxiliary heat ing must never be operat ed in closed rooms - risk of poisoning!
Def rost ing w indscreen - sw it ching on
Press t he but t on
Press t he but t on
f ig. 92.
f ig. 92.
Once again press the but t on
The t emperat ure cont rol is cont rolled aut omat ically. More air flows out of t he air
out let vent s 1 and 2.
The auxiliary heat ing must not be running during ref uelling - risk of f ire.
The exhaust pipe of t he auxiliary heat ing is locat ed on t he underside of

t he vehicle. Therefore do not place t he vehicle, if you w ish t o operat e t he auxiliary heat ing, in such a w ay t hat t he exhaust gases of t he auxiliary heat ing
can come easily int o cont act w it h inf lammable mat erials (e.g. dry grass) or
easily inf lammable subst ances (e.g. f uel run out ).
Def rost ing w indscreen - sw it ching of f

Once again press the but t on
or t he but t on AUTO .
95
Not e
Auxiliary heat ing (auxiliary heat ing and vent ilat ion)
If t he auxiliary heat ing runs, t he fuel consumpt ion comes from t he vehicle t ank.
The auxiliary heat ing aut omat ically cont rols t he filling level in t he fuel t ank. If only
a low quant it y of fuel is present in t he fuel t ank, t he funct ion of t he auxiliary heat ing is blocked.
Descript ion and import ant informat ion
The exhaust pipe of t he auxiliary heat ing, which is locat ed on t he underside of

t he vehicle, must not be clogged and t he exhaust flow must not be blocked.
The auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and vent ilat ion) heat s or
supplies t he interior of t he vehicle wit h fresh air independent of t he
engine.
If t he auxiliary heat ing and vent ilat ion is running, t he vehicle bat t ery discharges. If t he auxiliary heat ing and vent ilat ion has been operat ed several t imes over a
longer period, t he vehicle must be driven a few kilomet res in order t o recharge t he
vehicle bat t ery.
The auxiliary heat ing only sw it ches t he blow er on, if it has achieved a coolant
t emperat ure of approx. 50 C.
The auxiliary heat er (parking heat er) funct ions in connect ion w it h t he air-condit ioning syst em or Climat ronic.
It can be used when st at ionary, w hen engine is swit ched off for preheat ing of t he
vehicle as well as while driving (e.g. during t he heat ing phase of t he engine).
The engine is also preheat ed w hen t he vehicle is st at ionary and t he engine is
sw it ched off, if t he auxiliary heat ing is sw it ched on.
The auxiliary heat ing (auxiliary heat ing) warms up t he coolant during t he combust ion of fuel from t he vehicle t ank. The coolant w arms up t he air, which (if t he
blow er speed is not set t o zero) flow s int o t he occupant compart ment .
At low out side temperat ures, t his can result in a format ion of w at er vapour in
t he area of t he engine compart ment . This is quit e normal and is not an operat ing
problem.
Aft er swit ching off t he auxiliary heat ing, t he coolant pump runs for a short period.
The auxiliary heat ing and vent ilat ion does not swit ch on or comes on, if t he
vehicle bat t ery indicat es a low loading st at e.
The auxiliary heat ing (auxiliary heat ing) does not sw it ch on, if t he following
w as shown in t he informat ion display or before swit ching off the ignit ion: Please
ref uel!
Auxiliary vent ilat ion

The auxiliary vent ilat ion enables fresh air t o flow int o t he vehicle int erior by
sw it ching off t he engine, w hereby t he int erior t emperat ure is effect ively decreased (e.g. wit h t he vehicle parked in t he sun).
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Technical dat a
96
The air inlet in front of t he windscreen must be free of ice, snow or leaves in
order t o ensure t hat t he auxiliary heat ing operat es properly.
By select ing t he menu point Back, you will reach one level higher in t he menu
Aux. Heat ing.
So t hat warm air can flow int o t he vehicle int erior aft er swit ching on t he auxiliary heat ing, you must maint ain t he comfort t emperat ure normally select ed by you,
leave t he fan swit ched on and leave t he air out let vent s in an open posit ion. It is
recommended t o put t he air flow in t he posit ion or .
In t he menu Aux. heat ing select t he menu point Running t ime and set t he desired operat ing t ime in st eps of 5 minut es. The running t ime can be 10 t o 60
minut es.
By select ing t he menu point Back, you will reach in t he menu Aux. heat ing.
Direct sw it ching on/ off
In t he menu Aux. heat ing select t he menu point Mode.
In t he menu Mode select t he desired mode Heat ing or Vent ilat ion.
Programming
For t he programming of t he auxiliary heat ing (auxiliary heat ing and vent ilat ion) in
t he menu Aux. heat ing t here are t hree pre-set t imes:
St art ing t ime 1
St art ing t ime 2
St art ing t ime 3
Fig. 93 But t on f or direct sw it ching on/

of f of t he auxiliary heat ing (auxiliary
heat ing and vent ilat ion) on t he operat ing part of t he air condit ioning syst em
In each pre-set t ime, t he day and t he t ime (hour and minut e) can be set for
swit ching on t he auxiliary heat ing and/ or vent ilat ion.
The auxiliary heat ing (auxiliary heat ing and vent ilat ion) can be swit ched on or off
direct ly wit h t he but t on on t he air condit ioning syst em, Climat ronic- or heat ing
f ig. 93.
If t he auxiliary heat ing and vent ilat ion is not swit ched off earlier, it swit ches off
aut omat ically aft er t he expirat ion of t he set operat ing period, in t he menu Running t ime.
An empt y posit ion can be found bet w een Sunday and Monday w hen select ing t he
day. If t his empt y posit ion is select ed, t he act ivat ion is performed wit hout t aking
int o account t he day.
If you leave t he pre-set menu by select ing t he menu Back or do not make changes
on t he display for longer t han 10 seconds, t he set values are st ored, but t he preset t ime is not act ive.
Using t he syst em
Bot h ot her pre-set t imes can be programmed and st ored in t he same w ay.
So that t he auxiliary heat ing (auxiliary heat ing and ventilat ion)
funct ions according to your expect at ions, it is necessary t o carry
out the basic set ting before it s programming.
Only one programmed pre-set t ime can be act ive.
Basic set t ing

On t he informat ion display, select in t he Main menu t he menu point Aux. heat ing.
In t he menu Aux. heat ing select t he menu point Day of t he w k. and set t oday's dat e.
The last programmed pre-set t ime remains act ive.

Aft er t he auxiliary heat ing act ivat es at t he set t ime, it is necessary t o pre-set a
t ime again.
Changing t he act ive pre-set t ime is carried out aft er select ing t he menu point Act ivat e in t he menu Aux. heat ing by select ing a pre-set t ime.
The prerequisit e for t he correct sw it ching on of t he auxiliary heat ing (auxiliary
heat ing and vent ilat ion) according t o t he programmed pre-set t ime is t he correct
set t ing of t he current t ime and t he weekday page 96.
97
If t he syst em is running, a w arning light in the but t on for direct swit ching on/ off
of t he auxiliary heat ing light s up.
The auxiliary heat ing can only be swit ched on or off wit h t he radio remot e cont rol,
if t he dist ance bet ween t he radio remot e cont rol and t he vehicle is at least 2 m.
The running syst em deact ivat es aft er expirat ion of t he operat ing period or is deact ivat ed earlier by pressing t he but t on for direct sw it ching on/ off of t he auxiliary
heat ing page 96.
Warning light in t he radio remot e cont rol

The w arning light in t he radio remot e cont rol f ig. 94 indicat es aft er a keyst roke
if t he remot e cont rol signal was received by t he auxiliary heat ing and if t he bat t ery is adequat ely charged.
A random pre-set t ime can be deact ivat ed by select ing t he menu point Deact ivat e
in t he menu Act ivat e.
Display w arning light
Import ance
Light s up green for 2 seconds.
The auxiliary heat ing was swit ched on.
Light s up red for 2 seconds.
The auxiliary heat ing was swit ched off.
Radio remot e cont rol
Slow ly flashes green for 2 seconds.
The ignit ion signal was not received.
The auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and vent ilat ion) can be
switched on or off wit h t he remot e cont rol.
Quickly flashes green for 2 seconds.
The auxiliary heat ing is blocked, e. g

because t he t ank is nearly empt y or
t here is a fault in t he auxiliary heat ing.
Flashes red for 2 seconds.
The sw it ch off signal was not received.
Light s up orange for 2 seconds, t hen

green or red.
The bat t ery is w eak, how ever t he

sw it ching on or off signal w as received.
Light s up orange for 2 seconds, t hen

flashes green or red.
The bat t ery is w eak, how ever t he

sw it ching on or off signal w as not received.
Flashes orange for 5 seconds.
The bat t ery is discharged, how ever t he

sw it ching on or off signal w as not received.
Aft er select ing t he menu Fact ory set t ing in t he menu Aux. heat ing, it is possible
t o ret urn t o t he fact ory set t ing.
Fig. 94 Auxiliary heat ing: Radio remot e cont rol/ bot t om of t he radio remot e cont rol w it h t he
bat t ery cover
For sw it ching on, press t he but t on ON .
For sw it ching off, press t he but t on OFF .
If t he bat t ery is properly charged, t he effect ive range is up t o 600 m. For sw it ching
on or off t he auxiliary heat ing, hold t he remot e cont rol vert ically w it h t he ant enna
A f ig. 94 t ow ards the t op. You must not cover over t he ant enna wit h t he fingers or t he palm of t he hand. Obst acles bet ween t he radio remot e cont rol and t he
vehicle, bad w eat her condit ions and a weaker bat t ery can clearly reduce t he
range.
Saf et y
CAUTION
There are elect ronic component s in t he radio remot e cont rol, prot ect t he remot e
cont rol against w ater, severe shocks and direct sun rays.
Changing t he bat t ery of t he radio remot e cont rol
The t ransmit t er and t he bat t ery are housed in t he housing of t he remot e cont rol.
The receiver is locat ed in t he int erior of t he car.
Using t he syst em
Driving Tips
If t he w arning light of t he radio remot e cont rol indicat es a w eak or discharged

bat t ery, f ig. 94, it must be replaced. The bat t ery is locat ed under a cover on t he
back of t he radio remot e cont rol.
Insert a flat , blunt object , such as a coin, int o t he gap of t he bat t ery cover, t urn
it against t he direct ion of t he arrow up t o t he mark, and unlock t he cover
f ig. 94 - right .
Change t he bat tery, replace t he bat t ery cover and lock it by moving it in t he
direct ion of t he arrow.
Technical dat a
98

Dispose of a used bat t ery in accordance wit h environment al regulat ions.
Not e
Pay at t ent ion t o t he correct polarit y w hen changing t he bat t ery.
The replacement bat t ery must have t he same specificat ion as t he original bat t ery.
St art ing-off and Driving
99

Set t ing st eering w heel posit ion
If you adjust t he st eering w heel f urt her t ow ards t he head, you w ill reduce
t he prot ect ion off ered by t he driver airbag in t he event of an accident . Check
t hat t he st eering w heel is aligned t o t he chest .
When driving, hold t he st eering w heel w it h bot h hands firmly on t he out er
edge in t he 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock posit ion. Never hold t he st eering w heel
firmly in t he 12 o'clock posit ion or in anot her w ay (e.g. in t he middle of t he
st eering w heel or at t he inner st eering w heel edge). In such cases, injuries t o
t he arms, t he hands and t he head can occur w hen t he driver airbag is deployed.
Fig. 95 Adjust able st eering wheel: Lever next t o t he st eering column/ safe dist ance t o t he
st eering wheel
Ignit ion lock
You can set t he height and t he forw ard/ back posit ion of t he st eering wheel t o t he
desired posit ion.
Adjust t he driver seat page 61.
Pull t he lever below t he st eering wheel dow n f ig. 95 - left
Set t he st eering wheel t o t he desired posit ion (concerning height and forw ard/
back posit ion).
Push t he lever upwards as far as t he st op.

Fig. 96 Ignit ion lock posit ions
WARNING
You must not adjust t he st eering w heel w hen t he vehicle is moving!
The driver must maint ain a dist ance of at least 25 cm t o t he st eering w heel
f ig. 95 - right . Not maint aining t his minimum dist ance w ill mean t hat t he airbag syst em w ill not be able t o properly prot ect you - hazard!
For saf et y reasons t he lever must alw ays be f irmly pushed up t o avoid t he
st eering w heel alt ering it s posit ion unint ent ionally w hen driving - risk of accident !
Pet rol engines

1 - ignit ion swit ched off, engine off, t he st eering can be locked.
2 - ignit ion swit ched on
3 - st art engine
Diesel engines
1 - int errupt ion of fuel supply, ignit ion sw it ched off, engine off, t he st eering can
be locked.
2 - heat ing glow plugs on, ignit ion sw it ched on
You should not sw it ch on any major elect rical component s during t he heat ing
period ot herw ise t he vehicle bat t ery w ill be drained unnecessarily.

Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Technical dat a
100
St art ing t he engine
3 - st art engine
Applies t o all models:

Posit ion 1
General
You can only start the engine only using an original ignit ion key.
To lock t he st eering, w it h t he ignit ion key w it hdrawn, t urn t he st eering w heel unt il t he st eering locking pin is heard t o engage. You should alw ays lock t he st eering
as a general rule if you leave your vehicle. This act s as a det errent against possible
t heft of your vehicle .
Manual gearbox
Place t he gearshift lever int o neut ral and put on t he handbrake firmly before
st art ing t he engine.
Posit ion 2
Move t he st eering w heel back and forw ard a lit t le if t he ignit ion key cannot , or
cannot easily be t urned int o t his posit ion, in order t o release t he st eering lock.
Engage t he clut ch pedal and keep it depressed unt il t he engine st art s.
If you st art t he engine wit hout depressing t he clut ch pedal, t he engine does not
st art and t he following message appears in t he Informat ion display Depress
clut ch! (Depress clut ch!) or CLUTCH in t he display of t he inst rument clust er.
Posit ion 3
The engine is st art ed in t his posit ion. At t he same t ime, major elect rical component s are sw it ched off for short periods. The ignit ion key moves back int o posit ion
2 when one releases t he key.
Let go of t he key as soon as t he engine st art s ot herwise t here may be damage

t o t he st art er.
The ignit ion key must be t urned back int o posit ion 1 each t ime before st art ing
t he engine again. The st art er repeat lock in t he ignit ion lock prevent s t he st art er
being engaged when t he engine is running and t hus get t ing damaged.
Aut omat ic gearbox

Place t he gearshift lever int o P or N before st art ing t he engine, and apply t he
handbrake firmly.
Ignit ion key w it hdraw al lock (aut omat ic gearbox)
You can only wit hdraw t he ignit ion key aft er swit ching off t he ignit ion if t he select or lever is in posit ion P.
The engine running noises may louder at first be louder for a short t ime aft er
st art ing t he cold engine unt il oil pressure can be built up in t he hydraulic valve
clearance compensat ion. This is quit e normal and is not an operat ing problem.
WARNING
When driving, t he ignit ion key must alw ays be in t he posit ion 2 (ignit ion
sw it ched on) w it hout t he engine running. This posit ion is indicat ed by t he
w arning light s coming on. If t his is not t he case, it could result in unexpect ed
locking of t he st eering w heel - risk of accident !
If t he engine does not st art ...

You can use t he bat t ery of anot her vehicle as a jump-st art aid page 216.
Only remove t he ignit ion key f rom t he ignit ion lock w hen t he vehicle has
come t o a st andst ill (by applying t he handbrake or moving t he select or lever
int o t he posit ion P). The st eering lock can engage immediat ely - risk of accident !
Alw ays w it hdraw t he ignit ion key if you are going t o leave t he vehicle,
even f or a short t ime. This is part icularly import ant if children are lef t in t he
vehicle. The children might ot herw ise st art t he engine or sw it ch on elect rical
equipment (e.g. pow er w indow s) - risk of accident or injury!
Let go of t he key as soon as t he engine st art s ot herwise t here may be damage

t o t he st art er.
WARNING
Never run t he engine in non vent ilat ed or enclosed areas. The exhaust
gases of t he engine cont ain besides t he odorless and colourless carbon monoxide a poisonous gas - hazard! Carbon monoxide can cause unconsciousness
and deat h.
Never leave your vehicle unat t ended w it h t he engine running.

You should not sw it ch on any major elect rical component s during t he heat ing
period ot herw ise t he vehicle bat t ery w ill be drained unnecessarily.
CAUTION
The st art er may only be operat ed (ignit ion key posit ion 3 ), if t he engine is not
running. If t he st art er is immediat ely operat ed aft er sw it ching off t he engine, t he
st art er or t he engine can be damaged.
You should st art t he engine immediately aft er t he glow plug w arning light
has gone out .
The glow plug warning light will come on for about one second if t he engine is
at a normal operat ing t emperat ure or if the out side t emperat ure is above +5 C.
This means t hat you can st art t he engine right aw ay.
Int errupt t he at tempt at st art ing aft er 10 seconds if t he engine does not st art
right aw ay and w ait for about 30 seconds before repeat ing t he at t empt .
It is possible t hat t he fuse on t he diesel preglow syst em is defect if t he engine
st ill does not st art . Check t he fuse and replace it if necessary p age 220.
Cont act t he nearest specialist garage t o obt ain professional assist ance.
Avoid high engine revolut ions, full t hrot t le and high engine loads as long as
t he engine has not yet reached it s normal operat ing t emperat ure - risk of damaging t he engine!
Do not t ow st art t he engine - danger of damaging t he engine. On vehicles wit h
a cat alyt ic convert er, unburnt fuel may get int o t he cat alyt ic convert er w here it
may ignit e. This in t urn may damage or dest roy t he cat alyt ic convert er. You can
use t he bat t ery of anot her vehicle as a jump-st art aid p age 216, Jump-st art ing.

Never warm up t he engine when t he vehicle is st anding. Drive off right away.
Through t his t he engine reaches it s operat ing t emperat ure more rapidly and t he
pollut ant emissions are low er.
Pet rol engines
St art ing t he engine af t er t he f uel t ank has run dry

It may t ake longer t han normal t o st art t he engine aft er refuelling if t he fuel t ank
has run complet ely dry - up t o one minut e. This is because t he fuel syst em must
first of all be filled while t he at t empt ing t o st art t he engine.
Sw it ching off t he engine
These engines are fit t ed wit h a st art er syst em w hich select s t he correct fuel-air
mixt ure for every ext ernal air t emperat ure.
Do not operat e accelerat or before and when st art ing engine.
Int errupt t he at t empt at st art ing aft er 10 seconds if t he engine does not st art
right aw ayand w ait for about 30 seconds before repeat ing t he at t empt .
It is possible t hat t he fuse on t he elect rical fuel pump is defect if t he engine
st ill does not st art . Check t he fuse and replace it if necessary page 220.
Cont act t he nearest specialist garage t o obt ain professional assist ance.
It may be necessary, if t he engine is very hot , t o slight ly depress t he accelerat or
aft er t he engine has st art ed.
The engine can be swit ched off by t urning t he ignit ion key int o posit ion 1
f ig. 96.
WARNING
Never sw it ch off t he engine bef ore t he vehicle is st at ionary - risk of accident !
The brake boost er only operat es w hen t he engine is running. Great er

physical ef f ort f or braking is required when engine is sw it ched of f . Because if
you do not st op as normal, t his can cause an accident and severe injuries.
CAUTION
Diesel engines
Glow plug syst em
Diesel engines are equipped wit h a glow plug syst em, t he preglow period being
cont rolled aut omat ically in line w it h t he coolant t emperat ure and out side t emperat ure.
you should not switch t he engine off right aw ay at t he end of your journey aft er
t he engine has been operat ed for a lengthy period at high loads but should be allowed it t o run at idling speed for about 2 minut es. This prevent s any accumula
t ion of heat w hen t he engine is sw it ched off.
The preglow indicat or light comes on after t he ignit ion has been sw it ched on.
Using t he syst em
101
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Technical dat a
102
Pedals
Not e
The radiat or fan may cont inue running for a furt her 10 minut es or so aft er t he
engine and t he ignit ion have been sw it ched off. The coolant fan may, however, also swit ch on again aft er some t ime if t he coolant t emperat ure rises because of an
accumulat ion of heat in t he engine or if t he engine is w arm and t he engine compart ment is addit ionally heat ed by st rong sunlight .
This is why part icular care is required w hen carrying out any w ork in t he engine compart ment p age 190, Working in t he engine compart ment .
Operat ion of t he pedals must not be hindered!

WARNING
In t he driver's f oot w ell, only a f oot mat , w hich is at t ached t o t he t w o corresponding at t achment point s, may be used.
No object s are allow ed in t he driver's f oot w ell risk of obst ruct ion or limit at ion in operat ing t he pedal!
Shift ing (manual gearbox)
Not e
Great er brake pedal dist ances may be needed when t here is a fault in t he
brake syst em.
Use only foot mat s from t he range of KODA Original Accessories, w hich are at
t ached at t w o at t achment point s.
Handbrake
Fig. 97 The shif t pat t ern: 5-speed or 6speed manual gearbox
Shift int o reverse only w hen t he car is st at ionary. Depress t he clut ch pedal and
hold it fully depressed. Wait a moment before engaging reverse gear in order t o
avoid any shift noises.
The reversing light s will come on once reverse gear is engaged, provided t he ignit ion is on.
WARNING
Never engage t he reverse gear w hen driving - risk of accident !
Not e
One should not lay t he hand on t he shift lever while driving t he vehicle. The
pressure of t he hand w ill be t ransferred t o t he gearshift forks in t he gearbox. This
can, over a period of t ime, lead t o early wear of t he gearshift forks.
Depress t he clut ch pedal fully when changing gears, in order t o avoid unneces
sary wear and damage.
Fig. 98 Cent re console: Handbrake
Applying t he handbrake
Pull t he handbrake lever up fully.
Releasing t he handbrake
Pull t he handbrake lever up slight ly and at t he same t ime press in t he locking
but t on f ig. 98.
Hold t he but t on pressed and push t he handbrake lever dow n fully

The handbrake warning light light s up when t he handbrake is applied, provided
t he ignit ion is on.
The audible parking aid det ermines t he dist ance from t he rear bumper t o an obst acle behind t he car wit h t he aid of ult rasound sensors. The t ones of t he parking
aid can be adapt ed in t he menu of t he Informat ion display page 20. The sensors
are int egrat ed in t he rear bumper.
A w arning signal sounds and t he following t ext appears in t he Informat ion display
if you have inadvert ent ly driven off wit h t he handbrake applied:
Range of sensors
The clearance w arning begins at a dist ance of about 160 cm from t he obst acle
(area A f ig. 99). The int erval bet ween t he warning signals becomes short er as
t he clearance is reduced.
Release parking brake!

The handbrake warning is act ivat ed if you drive at a speed of more t han 6 km/ h
for more t han 3 seconds.
A cont inuous t one sounds from a dist ance of approx. 30 cm (area B ) - danger
area. You should not reverse any f urt her af t er t his signal sounds! If t he vehicle is
equipped wit h a fact ory-fit t ed t ow ing device, t he indicat ion t hreshold of t he danger area st art s - cont inuous t one - 5 cm furt her behind t he vehicle. The vehicle
can be ext ended t hrough an inst alled det achable t ow ing device.
WARNING
Please not e t hat t he handbrake must be fully released. A handbrake w hich
is only part ially released can result in t he rear brakes overheat ing w hich w ill
have a negat ive ef f ect on t he operat ion of t he brake syst em - risk of accident !
In addit ion t his can result in premat ure wear of t he rear brake pads.
On fact ory-fit t ed radio navigat ion syst ems and car st ereos, t he dist ance t o t he obst ruct ion can also be show n graphically in t he display. On vehicles wit h a fact oryfit t ed t ow ing device, t he rear sensors are deact ivat ed w hen t ow ing a t railer. The
driver is informed about t his by a graphic display (vehicle t ow ing a t railer) in t he
radio or t he radio navigat ion display. The fact ory-fit t ed radio or navigat ion syst em
can be set so t hat t he play funct ion volume decreases when act ivat ing t he parking aid, see Owner's Manual radio or radio navigat ion syst em. As a result , t he signal t ones from t he parking aid can be bet t er recognised.
Never leave children unat t ended in t he vehicle. The children might , f or example, release t he handbrake or t ake t he vehicle out of gear. The vehicle
might t hen move of f - risk of accident !
CAUTION
Aft er t he car has come t o a st op, always first of all apply t he handbrake firmly before t hen addit ionally engaging a gear (manual gearbox) or moving t he select or
lever int o posit ion P (aut omat ic gearbox).
Act ivat ing

The parking aid is act ivat ed aut omat ically when reverse gear is engaged and t he
ignit ion is t urned on. This is confirmed by a brief audible signal.
Rear parking aid

The parking aid provides a warning of obst acles behind t he vehicle.
Deact ivat ing

The parking aid is deact ivat ed by removing t he reverse gear.
Fig. 99 Parking aid: Det ect ion range of

rear sensors
Using t he syst em
103
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Technical dat a
104

The audible parking aid det ermines t he dist ance bet w een t he front or rear bumper and an obst acle w it h t he aid of ult rasound sensors. The sensors are int egrat ed
in t he front and rear bumper. The signal t ones for t he front parking aid sound
higher as st andard t han for t he rear parking aid. The t ones of t he parking aid can
be adapt ed in t he menu of t he Informat ion display page 20.
WARNING
The parking aid is not a subst it ut e f or t he driver paying proper at t ent ion
and it is alw ays t he driver's responsibilit y t o t ake care w hen parking t he vehicle or carrying out similar manoeuvres.
You should t heref ore sat isf y yourself , before reversing, t hat t here is no
small obst acle, such as a rock, t hin post , t railer draw bar et c., behind your vehicle. Such an obst acle might not be w it hin t he range det ect ed by t he sensors.
Range of sensors
The dist ance warning begins at a dist ance of about 120 cm from t he obst acle in
front of t he vehicle (area A f ig. 100) and about 160 cm from t he obst acle behind
t he vehicle (area A f ig. 99). The int erval bet w een t he w arning signals becomes
short er as t he clearance is reduced.
Under cert ain circumst ances, surf aces of cert ain object s and t ypes of
clot hing cannot ref lect t he signal of t he parking aid. Thus, t hese object s or
people w ho w ear such clot hing are not recognised by t he sensors of t he parking aid.
A cont inuous t one sounds from a dist ance of approx. 30 cm (area B ) - danger
area. From t his moment on do not cont inue driving! If t he vehicle is equipped
wit h a fact ory-fit t ed t owing device, t he indicat ion t hreshold of t he danger area
st art s - cont inuous t one - 5 cm furt her behind t he vehicle. The vehicle can be ext ended t hrough an inst alled det achable t ow ing device.
Not e
The parking aid does not operat e if you are t owing a t railer (applies t o models
w hich feat ure a fact ory-fit t ed t owing device).
If a w arning signal sounds for about 3 seconds aft er sw it ching t he ignit ion on
and engaging reverse gear, and t here is no obst acle close t o your car, t his indicat es a syst em fault . Have t he fault rect ified by a specialist workshop.
The sensors must be kept clean and free of ice t o enable t he parking aid t o
operat e properly.
Front and rear parking aid

The parking aid provides a warning of obst acles in front and behind
t he vehicle.
On fact ory-fit t ed radio navigat ion syst ems and car st ereos, t he dist ance t o t he obst ruct ion can also be show n graphically in t he display. On vehicles wit h a fact oryfit t ed t owing device, t he rear sensors are deact ivat ed w hen t owing a t railer. The
driver is informed about t his by a graphic display (vehicle t owing a t railer) in t he
radio or t he radio navigat ion display. The fact ory-fit t ed radio or navigat ion syst em
can be set so t hat t he play funct ion volume decreases when act ivat ing t he parking aid, see Owner's Manual radio or radio navigat ion syst em. As a result , t he signal t ones from t he parking aid can be bet t er recognised.
Act ivat ing
The parking aid is act ivat ed w hen t he reverse gear is engaged and t he ignit ion is
swit ched on or by pressing t he but t on f ig. 100 - left , t he symbol light s up in
t he but t on. The act ivat ion is confirmed by a brief acknowledgement signal.
Deact ivat ing
The parking aid is deactivat ed aft er pressing t he but t on f ig. 100 - left , or at a
speed of more t han 10 km/ h - t he symbol in t he but t on is no longer illuminat ed.
Fig. 100 Act ivat ing t he parking aid/ det ect ion range of t he f ront sensors
105
Funct ion of t he syst em is based on:
WARNING
Lengt h and dept h measurement of t he parking spaces when driving

Evaluat ion of t he size of t he parking space
Definit ion of t he correct posit ion of t he vehicle for parking
Calculat ing t he line on which t he vehicle drives backwards int o t he parking
space
Act uat ion of t he st eering force assist ance, aut omat ic spinning of t he w heels
of t he front axle when parking.
The parking aid is not a subst it ut e f or t he driver paying proper at t ent ion
and it is alw ays t he driver's responsibilit y t o t ake care w hen reversing t he vehicle or carrying out similar manoeuvres.
You should t heref ore sat isf y yourself , bef ore reversing, t hat t here is no
small obst acle, such as a rock, t hin post , t railer draw bar et c., in front or behind
your vehicle. Such an obst acle might not be w it hin t he range det ect ed by t he
sensors.
clot hing cannot ref lect t he signal of t he parking aid. Thus, t hese object s or
people w ho w ear such clot hing are not recognised by t he sensors of t he parking aid.
WARNING
The park assist does not t ake aw ay t he responsibilit y f rom t he driver w hen
parking.
Pay part icular at t ent ion t o small children and animals as t hey w ould not be
recognised by t he sensors of t he parking aid.
Not e
Only t he front parking aid operat es if you are t owing a t railer (applies only t o
models which feat ure a fact ory-fit t ed t ow ing device).
clot hing cannot ref lect t he signal of t he park assist or t he parking aid. Thus,
t hese object s or people w ho w ear such clot hing are not recognised by t he
sensors of t he parking aid.
If a w arning signal sounds for about 3 seconds aft er act ivat ing t he syst em and
t here is no obst acle close t o your car, t his indicat es a syst em fault . The fault is
confirmed addit ionally w hen t he symbol flashes in t he but t on f ig. 100 - left .
Have t he fault rect ified by a specialist w orkshop.
The ext ernal sound source of t he park assist and t he parking aid can be
disrupt ively inf luenced and under unf avourable condit ions, object s or people
cannot be recognised by t he sensors of t he parking aid.
operat e properly.
If t he parking aid is act ivat ed and t he select or lever of t he aut omat ic gearbox
is in t he posit ion P , warning signal indicat es int errupt ion (vehicle can no longer
move).
CAUTION
If ot her vehicles are parked behind or on t he kerb, t he park assist guides your
vehicle beyond t he kerb or ont o it . Make sure t hat t he w heels or t he wheel rims of
your vehicle are not damaged and if necessary int ervene in t ime.
Park Assist
You should sat isfy yourself before parking t hat t here is no small obst acle, such
as a rock, t hin post , t railer draw bar et c., in front or behind your vehicle. Such an
obst acle might not be wit hin t he range det ect ed by t he sensors.
Descript ion and import ant informat ion
Under cert ain circumst ances, surfaces or st ruct ures of cert ain object s such as
w ire mesh fences, pow der snow et c..., cannot be recognised by t he syst em.
The park assist assist s you w hen parking in a suit able parallel parking space bet ween t wo vehicles or behind a vehicle.
The evaluat ion of t he parking space and t he parking procedure depends on

t he circumference of t he w heels. Under cert ain circumst ances, t he syst em may
not funct ion correctly if your vehicle is mount ed wit h w heels of non-permissible
size, snow chains or a t emporary spare wheel (in order t o reach t he nearest w orkshop). If t he t yres other t han t hose except ed by t he manufacturer are mount ed,
t he result ing posit ion of t he vehicle in t he parking space can differ slight ly. The
parking assist ant syst em aut omat ically performs t he correct ion of t he w heel cir
cumference w hen driving.
The park assist aut omat ically searches for suit able parking spaces aft er sw it ching
on t he ignit ion and w hen driving up t o 30 km/ h.
During t he parking procedure t he park assist only t akes over t he st eering movement s, t he pedals cont inue t o be operat ed by t he driver.
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Technical dat a
106
The accuracy of t he evaluat ion for t he parking space can be influenced by t he

incorrect ly det ermined out side t emperat ure if t he lat er is influenced by t he t hermal radiat ion of t he engine i.e for st op and go in a t raffic jam.
If you press t he but t on at a speed great er t han 30 km/ h and less than 50 km/ h,
t he message indicat ing t hat t he speed for det ect ing t he space is exceeded w ill be
displayed in t he informat ion display of t he inst rument clust er. If t he speed drops
below 30 km/ h, t he condit ion of t he parking assist ant is aut omat ically displayed in
t he informat ion display of t he inst rument clust er. When exceeding t he speed of
50 km/ h, it is required t o act ivat e t he display again by pressing t he but t on
f ig. 101.
In order t o avoid damaging t he sensors w hile cleaning wit h high-pressure

cleaners or st eam jet s, t he sensors must only be direct ly sprayed for short periods
w hile a minimum dist ance of 10 cm must be observed.
Not e
Not e
A component of t he park assist is t he front and rear parking aid.
The elect ronic st abilit y programme (ESP) must always be sw it ched on for t he
parking procedure.
The search for suit able parking spaces is aut omat ic aft er sw it ching on t he ignit ion at speeds of more t han 30 km/ h. Searching for a parking space is performed
at t he same t ime on t he driver and front passenger side.
Only t he front parking aid operat es if you are t owing a t railer (applies only t o
models which feat ure a fact ory-fit t ed t ow ing device). This is w hy it is not possible
t o park backw ards w it h t he help of t he park assist w hen t ow ing a t railer.
operat e properly.
Sw it ch on display of t he park assist in t he informat ion display
Fig. 101 Sw it ching on t he park assist / inf ormat ion display: Finding a suit able parking space
Sw it ch on display of t he park assist in t he inf ormat ion display

Press t he but t on f ig. 101.
Drive past t he parking row up t o maximum 30 km/ h and w it h a dist ance of

0.5 m t o 1.5 m f ig. 101.
Operat e t he t urn signal for t he driver's side if you wish t o park on t his side of t he
road. In t he informat ion display t he search area for t he parking space is indicat ed
on t he driver's side.
If t he park assist is swit ched on, a yellow w arning light light s up in t he but t on.
If t he sensors find a suit able parking space, t hey st ore it s paramet ers unt il anot her suit able parking space has been found or unt il a dist ance of 10 m had been
driven aft er finding t he parking space. This is why it is possible t o sw it ch on t he
park assist aft er driving past t he parking space and t he informat ion on whet her
t his parking space is suit able for parking appears in t he informat ion display.
Parking w it h t he help of t he park assist and concluding t he

parking procedure
Fig. 102 Informat ion display: t he det ermined parking space w it h t he inf ormat ion t o drive on
A and f or engaging t he reverse gear B
107
Observe t he surroundings and reverse carefully at a maximum speed of 7 km/ h

w it h t he help of t he pedal.
In t he event t hat t he parking procedure cannot be carried out in one go, proceed t o parking in furt her st ages. If t he forward arrow flashes in t he informat ion display f ig. 103 C , engage t he forw ard gear.
Observe t he surroundings and drive forward carefully at a maximum speed of

7 km/ h wit h t he help of t he pedal.
If t he backward arrow in t he informat ion display f ig. 103 D flashes, once

again engage t he reverse gear or move t he select or lever int o t he posit ion R
and reverse carefully. You can repeat t hese st eps several t imes.
End t he parking procedure from a dist ance on t he basis of t he informat ion of

t he syst em.
As soon as t he parking procedure is complet ed, an audible signal sounds and in

t he informat ion display t he following message appears: St eering int erv. f inished.
Please t ake over st eering! .
Sw it ch off park assist
The park assist switches off during one of t he follow ing occurrences:
Fig. 103 Inf ormat ion display: Informat ion f or engaging t he f orw ard gear C or t he reverse
gear D
The t ime limit for t he parking procedure w it h t he help of t he park assist last s
180 seconds.
If t he park assist has recognised a suit able parking space, it is shown in t he

informat ion display f ig. 102 A .
Drive on furt her unt il t he display f ig. 102 B appears.
Bring t he vehicle t o a st op for at least 1 second.
Engage t he reverse gear or move t he select or lever int o t he posit ion R.
As soon as t he follow ing message is show n in t he informat ion display: St eering int erv. act ive. Monit or area around veh.! (St eering int ervent ion act ive. ,
let go of t he st eering wheel, t he st eering w ill be t aken over by t he syst em.
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
a speed of 30 km/ h is exceeded,

a speed of 7 km/ h is exceeded during t he parking procedure,
a t ime limit of 180 seconds is exceeded for t he parking procedure,
t he but t on for t he park assist is pressed,
parking aid is act ivat ed,
sw it ch off TCS syst em,
int ervent ion of t he driver in t he aut omat ic st eering procedure (st op t he st eering w heel),
Disengage reverse gear or t ake select or lever out of t he posit ion R w hen reversing int o t he parking space.
Furt her w arning and inf ormat ion t ext s of t he park assist in t he inf ormat ion
display:
Park Assist f inished.
The parking procedure has ended or aft er sw it ching on t he ignit ion, t he vehicle
has not been driven above 10 km/ h.
Park Assist : Speed t oo high!
Reduce t he speed below 30 km/ h.
Technical dat a
108
Driver st eering int ervent ion: Please t ake over st eering!
Park Assist : ASR int ervent ion.
The parking procedure is ended t hrough driver int ervent ion.
Int ervent ion of t he TCS w hile searching for a suit able parking place.
Park Assist f inished. ASR deact ivat ed.

The parking procedure cannot be carried out because t he TCS syst em is sw it ched
off.
ASR int ervent ion! Please t ake over st eering!

Parking procedure is ended t hrough t he int ervent ion of t he TCS.
ASR deact ivat ed. Please t ake over st eering!

The parking procedure w as ended because t he TCS syst em w as switched off during t he parking procedure.
The st at ionary t ime of the vehicle was less than 1 second.
Trailer: Park Assist f inished.

The parking procedure is not possible because t he t railer is hit ched and a plug is
insert ed in t he socket of t he t owing device.
Park Assist : St at ionary t ime not suf f icient .
Park Assist : Speed t oo low .

Aft er t he ignit ion is sw it ched on, t he vehicle must exceed t he speed of 10 km/ h at
least once.
Time limit exceeded. Please t ake over st eering!
Cruise cont rol syst em (CCS)
The parking procedure w as ended because a t ime limit of 180 seconds for parking
w as exceeded.
Int roduct ion
Park Assist current ly not available.

The Park Assist cannot be swit ched on because a fault exist s on t he vehicle. Have
t he fault rect ified by a specialist w orkshop.
Park Assist ended. Syst em current ly not available.
The parking procedure w as ended because a fault exist s on t he vehicle. Have t he
fault rect ified by a specialist workshop.
Park Assist f ault y. Workshop!
The parking procedure is not possible because a fault exist s on t he park assist .
Have t he fault rect ified by a specialist workshop.
St eering int erv. act ive. Monit or area around veh.!
The Park Assist is act ive and t akes over t he st eering movement s. Observe t he
surroundings and carefully drive backwards, at t he same t ime operat e t he pedal.
Please t ake over st eering! Finish parking manually!
Take over t he st eering. End t he parking procedure w it hout using t he park assist .
Speed t oo high! Please t ake over st eering!
The parking procedure w as ended because t he speed w as exceeded.
The cruise cont rol syst em (CCS) maint ains a const ant speed, more t han 30 km/ h
(20 mph), once it has been set , wit hout you having t o depress t he accelerat or
pedal. This is only possible wit hin t he range which is permit t ed by t he pow er out put and braking power of t he engine. The cruise cont rol syst em makes it possible
- part icularly on long journeys - for you t o rest your accelerat or foot .
WARNING
For safet y reasons, t he cruise cont rol syst em must not be used in dense
t raf f ic or on unf avourable road surfaces (such as icy roads, slippery roads,
loose gravel) - risk of accident !
In order t o prevent unint ent ional use of t he cruise cont rol syst em, alw ays
sw it ch of f t he syst em af t er use.
109
This does not apply, how ever, if you drive at a speed which is more t han 10 km/ h
higher t han t he saved speed for a period of more t han 5 minutes. The st ored
speed w ill be cancelled in t he memory. You t hen have t o re-st ore t he desired
speed.
Not e
Models fit t ed wit h a manual gearbox: Always depress t he clut ch pedal if you
sw it ch on t he cruise cont rol syst em w hen the gearbox is in Neut ral! Ot herw ise t he
engine can rev up unint ent ionally.
The cruise cont rol syst em is not able t o maint ain a const ant speed w hen driving on st eep downhill sect ions. The w eight of t he vehicle increases t he speed at
which it t ravels. One should shift dow n in good t ime t o a lower gear or slow t he
vehicle down by applying t he foot brake.
One can reduce t he speed in t he usual manner. The syst em is sw it ched off t emporarily by act uat ing t he brake or clut ch pedal page 110.
It is not possible on vehicles fit t ed w it h an aut omat ic gearbox t o sw it ch on t he

cruise cont rol syst em if t he select or lever is in t he posit ion P, N or R.
First ensure t hat it is not t oo high f or t he t raff ic condit ions which exist at t hat
moment bef ore resuming t he st ored speed.
St oring a speed
WARNING
Changing a st ored speed

You can also change the speed of t he vehicle wit hout depressing
t he accelerat or.
Fast er
You can increase t he st ored speed wit hout depressing t he accelerat or, by
pressing t he rocker but t on B f ig. 104 in t he RES posit ion.
The speed of t he car w ill increase cont inuously if you hold t he rocker but t on
pressed in t he RES posit ion. Once t he car has reached t he desired speed, release t he rocker but t on. The set speed is t hen st ored in t he memory.
Fig. 104 Operat ing lever: Rocker but t on

and sw it ch of t he cruise cont rol syst em
The cruise cont rol syst em is operat ed by means of t he swit ch A f ig. 104 and
t he rocker but t on B in t he left lever of t he mult i-funct ional switch.
Press t he swit ch A f ig. 104 int o t he posit ion ON.
Aft er t he desired speed has been reached, press t he rocker but t on B int o t he
SET posit ion.
Aft er you have released t he rocker but t on B out of t he posit ion SET, t he speed
you have just st ored is maint ained at a const ant speed wit hout having t o depress
t he accelerat or.
You can increase t he speed by depressing the accelerat or. Releasing t he accelerat or will cause t he speed t o drop again t o t he set speed.
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Slow er
You can decrease t he st ored speed by pressing t he rocker but t on B in t he

SET- posit ion.
Holding dow n t he rocker but t on pressed in t he SET posit ion will cause t he
speed of t he vehicle t o reduce cont inuously. Once t he car has reached t he desired speed, release t he rocker but t on. The set speed is t hen st ored in t he
memory.
If you release t he rocker but t on w hen t he car is t ravelling at a speed of less

t han 30 km/ h, t he speed is not st ored, t he memory is erased. It is t hen necessary t o again st ore t he speed wit h t he rocker but t on B in t he posit ion SET
aft er an increase in speed of t he vehicle t o more t han 30 km/ hour.
Technical dat a
110
Sw it ching off t he cruise cont rol syst em t emporarily
In t he st art -st op mode, t he engine aut omat ically swit ches t o t he vehicle's idle
phase, e.g. w hen st opped at t raffic light s.
You can sw it ch of f t he cruise cont rol syst em t emporarily by depressing t he

brake pedal or clut ch pedal, on vehicles fit t ed w it h an aut omat ic gearbox only
wit h t he brake pedal.
Informat ion regarding t he current st at e of t he START-STOP syst em is indicat ed

in t he display of t he inst rument clust er.
You can swit ch off t emporarily t he cruise cont rol syst em, if you press t he
sw it ch A in t he middle posit ion.
Aut omat ic engine shut dow n (st op phase)

St op t he vehicle (w here necessary, apply t he handbrake).
The set speed remains st ored in t he memory.

The Resumpt ion of t he st ored speed is achieved by releasing t he brake or clut ch
pedal, on vehicles fit t ed wit h aut omat ic gearbox only aft er releasing t he brake
pedal and aft er short ly pressing t he rocker but t on B f ig. 104 int o t he posit ion
RES.
Take t he vehicle out of gear.
Take your foot off the clut ch.
Aut omat ic engine rest art (st art phase).
Push dow n on t he clut ch.
Sw it ching t he START-STOP syst em on and off

You can sw it ch t he START STOP syst em on/ off by pressing t he but t on f ig. 105.
WARNING
First ensure t hat it is not t oo high f or t he t raff ic condit ions w hich exist at t hat
moment bef ore resuming t he st ored speed.
When st art -st op mode is deact ivat ed, t he warning light in t he but t on light s up.
Sw it ching off t he cruise cont rol syst em complet ely
Press t he sw it ch A f ig. 104 t o t he right int o posit ion OFF.
If t he vehicle is in t he st op phase w hen manually swit ching off t he syst em, t he engine st art s immediat ely.
The START-STOP syst em is very complex. Some of t he procedures are hard t o
check wit hout servicing. The general condit ions for t he proper funct ioning of t he
START-STOP syst em are list ed in t he following overview .
Condit ions f or t he aut omat ic engine shut dow n (st op phase)
(START-STOP)
The gearshift lever is in Neut ral.

The clut ch pedal is not pressed!
The driver has fast ened t he seat belt .
The driver's door is closed.
The bonnet is closed.
The vehicle is at a st andst ill.
The fact ory-fit t ed t owing device is not elect rically connect ed t o a t railer.
The engine is at operat ing t emperat ure.
Fig. 105 Dash panel: START-STOP Syst em but t on
The START-STOP syst em helps you t o save fuel w hile at t he same t ime reducing
harmful exhaust emissions and CO2 emissions.
The funct ion is aut omat ically act ivat ed each t ime t he ignit ion is switched on.
The charge st at e of t he vehicle bat t ery is sufficient .

The st at ionary vehicle is not on a st eep slope or a st eep dow nhill sect ion.
The engine speed is less t han 1200 1/ min.
The t emperat ure of t he vehicle bat t ery is not t oo low or t oo high.

The pressure in t he brake syst em is sufficient .
The difference bet w een t he out door- and t he set t emperat ure in t he int erior is
not t oo great .
The vehicle speed since t he last t ime t he engine was sw it ched off w as great er
t han 3 km/ h.
No cleaning of t he diesel part icle filt er t akes place page 24
The front wheels are not t urned excessively (t he st eering angle is less t han 3/ 4
of a st eering wheel revolut ion).
Condit ions for an aut omat ic rest art (st art phase)
WARNING
The brake servo unit and pow er st eering only operat e if t he engine is running.
Never let t he vehicle roll w it h t he engine sw it ched of f .
CAUTION
If t he START-STOP syst em is used at very high out side t emperat ures over a very
long period of t ime, t he vehicle bat t ery can be damaged.
Not e
The clut ch is pressed.

The max./ min. t emperat ure is set .
The Defrost funct ion for t he w indscreen is swit ched on.
A high blower st age has been select ed.
The START STOP but t on is pressed.
Condit ions for an aut omat ic rest art w it hout driver int ervent ion
The vehicle moves at a speed of more t han 3 km/ h.
The difference bet w een t he out door- and t he set t emperat ure in t he int erior is
t oo great .
Changes t o t he out door t emperat ure can have an effect on t he int ernal t emperat ure of t he vehicle bat t ery even aft er several hours. If t he vehicle remains
out doors for a long t ime in minus t emperat ures or in direct sunlight , it can t ake
several hours unt il t he int ernal t emperat ure of t he vehicle batt ery reaches a suit able t emperat ure for proper operat ion of t he START STOP syst em.
In some inst ances it may be necessary t o st art t he engine manually w it h t he
ignit ion key (e.g. when t he seat belt is not insert ed or t he driver's door is opened
for more t han 30 seconds). Follow t he messages in t he inst rument clust er display.
If t he Climat ronic is running in aut omat ic mode, under cert ain condit ions, t he
engine may not sw it ch off aut omat ically.
The charge st at e of t he vehicle bat t ery is not sufficient .

The pressure in t he brake syst em is not sufficient .
Messages in t he inst rument clust er display (valid f or vehicles w it hout
Inf ormat ion display)
ERROR: START STOP
Error in t he START-STOP syst em
START STOP NOT POSSIBLE
Aut omat ic engine shut down is not

possible
START STOP ACTIVE
Aut omat ic engine shut down (st op

phase)
SWITCH OFF IGNITION
Sw it ch off t he ignit ion
START MANUALLY
Using t he syst em
St art t he engine manually
Saf et y
111
Driving Tips
Technical dat a
112
Aut omat ic gearbox DSG

Informat ion for driving w it h t he aut omat ic gearbox DSG
The abbreviat ion DSG means Direct shift gearbox (Direct shift gearbox).
Tw o independent clut ches are needed for t he pow er t ransmission bet ween t he
engine and t he gearbox. These replace t he t orque convert er of t he convent ional
aut omat ic gearbox. Their shift ing is mat ched in such a way t hat t here are no jerks
w hen shift ing t he gear and t he pow er t ransmission of t he engine t o t he front
w heels is not int errupt ed. You can also, how ever, sw it ch t he gearbox over int o t he
Tipt ronic mode. This mode makes it possible for you t o also shift gears manually
page 115.
Depress t he brake pedal fully and keep it depressed.
Press t he Shift lock but t on (but t on in handle of t he select or lever), move t he

select or lever int o t he desired posit ion, e.g. D page 113, and t hen release
t he Shift lock but t on.
Release t he brake pedal and depress t he accelerat or
It is sufficient t o engage select or lever posit ion P w hen parking on a flat surface.
When parking on a slope you should first apply t he handbrake firmly and t hen
move t he select or lever int o posit ion P. This is t o ensure t hat t here is no excessive
pressure act ing on t he lock mechanism and t hat it is easier t o subsequent ly move
t he select or lever out of posit ion P. If t he select or lever is not in t he P posit in
when t he driver's door is open and t he ignit ion is swit ched off, or if it is not in t he
P posit ion when t he ignit ion is swit ched off and t he driver's door is opened, t he
follow ing message will appear in t he Informat ion display: Move select or lever t o
posit ion P! or, in t he inst rument clust er display: P. The message disappears aft er a few seconds by swit ching on t he ignit ion or by moving t he select or lever int o
t he posit ion P.
If t he select or lever posit ion N is select ed by accident while driving it is first necessary t o release pressure on t he accelerat or pedal and wait for idling speed of
t he engine t o be reached before engaging a drive posit ion in t he select or lever.
St art ing-of f and Driving
appear in t he Informat ion display Move select or lever t o posit ion P/ N! or, in t he
inst rument clust er display: P/ N. At t emperat ures below -10 C t he engine can
only be st art ed in t he select or lever posit ion P.
St op
The select or lever posit ion N does not have t o be select ed when st opping just
for a short t ime, such as at a cross roads. It is sufficient t o hold t he vehicle st at ionary using t he foot brake. The engine can, however, be allow ed just t o idle.
Parking
Depress t he brake pedal and hold it depressed.
Apply t he handbrake firmly.
Press and Shift lock but t on in t he select or lever, move t he selector lever t o P
and t hen release t he Shift lock but t on.
The engine can only be st art ed when t he select or lever is in posit ion P or N . If t he
select or lever is not in t he P or N posit ions w hen locking t he st eering, swit ching
t he ignit ion on or off or when leaving t he engine on, t he following message w ill
WARNING
Do not depress t he accelerat or w hen changing t he posit ion of t he select or
lever if t he car is st at ionary and t he engine is running - risk of accident !
Never move t he select or lever int o posit ion R or P w hen driving - risk of an
accident !
If you are st opping at a hill (dow nhill sect ion), never t ry t o hold t he car st at ionary w it h t he gear engaged by means of t he accelerat or , t his means by
let t ing t he clut ch slip. This can lead t o overheat ing of t he clut ch. If t here is a
risk of overheat ing of t he clut ch due t o overload, t he clut ch is opened aut omat ically and t he vehicle rolls backw ard - risk of accident !
If you must st op at a slope, depress and hold t he brake pedal, so t hat you
can prevent t he vehicle from rolling back.
113
R - Reverse gear
CAUTION
Reverse gear must only be engaged w hen t he vehicle is st at ionary and t he engine
idling .
The double clut ch on t he aut omat ic gearbox DSG is equipped w it h an overload

prot ect ion. If you make use of t he uphill funct ion on a vehicle which is st at ionary
or driving slow ly uphill, it will result in an increase of t hermal st ress of t he clut ches.
In t he event t hat t hey overheat , t he w arning light and a warning t ext appears in t he informat ion display page 30. In such a case bring the vehicle t o a
st op, sw it ch off t he engine and wait unt il t he warning light and t he warning go
out - risk of gearbox damage! You can cont inue t he t rip as soon as t he warning
light and t he warning go out .
The brake pedal must be depressed and at t he same t ime t he Shift lock must be
pressed, if you wish t o obt ain t he select or lever posit ions R, P or N.
When t he ignit ion is swit ched on and t he select or lever is in posit ion R, t he reverse light s will come on.
N - Neut ral
The t ransmission is in Neut ral in t his posit ion.

The brake pedal must be depressed (if t he lever is in it s posit ion for longer t han 2
seconds) in order t o move t he select or lever out of t he posit ion N int o t he posit ion
D or R, w it h t he ignit ion sw it ched on, on a vehicle t ravelling at less t han 5 km/
hour or on a st at ionary vehicle.
Select or lever posit ions
D - Posit ion f or driving forw ard
When t he select or lever is in t his posit ion, t he forward gears are shift ed up and
down aut omat ically in line wit h engine load, vehicle speed and t he dynamic shift
programme.
You must depress t he brake pedal if you wish t o move int o posit ion D from N
w hen t he vehicle is t ravelling at less t han 5 km/ hour or is st at ionary .
Fig. 106 Select or lever/ inf ormat ion display: Select or lever posit ions
The current select or lever posit ion is indicat ed in t he informat ion display of t he inst rument clust er f ig. 106 - right . In t he posit ions D and S t he gear you have already engaged will be addit ionally displayed on t he display.
P - Parklock
The driven wheels are locked mechanically in t his posit ion.
The Parklock must only be engaged when t he vehicle is st at ionary
If you wish t o move t he select or lever int o or out of t his posit ion, you must press
t he Shift lock but t on in t he handle of t he select or lever and at t he same t ime depress t he brake pedal.
Under cert ain circumst ances (e.g. when driving in mount ainous regions or when
t owing a t railer) it may be beneficial t o select t he manual shift programme
page 115 for a short t ime in order t o adapt t he gearbox rat ios manually t o t he
driving sit uat ions.
S - Posit ion f or sport y st yle of driving
Shift ing up lat er int o a higher gear makes it possible t o fully exploit t he pow er pot ent ial of t he engine. The gearbox also t hen shift s dow n at higher engine speeds
as in t he posit ion D.
The Shift lock on t he select or lever grip must be pressed w hen moving t he select or lever out of t he posit ion D int o t he posit ion S.
If t he bat t ery is used, t he select or lever cannot be moved out of t he posit ion P.
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Technical dat a
114

Keylock - Ignit ion key w it hdraw al lock
WARNING
Never move t he select or lever int o posit ion R or P w hen driving - risk of an
accident !
You can only w it hdraw t he ignit ion key aft er swit ching off t he ignit ion if t he select or lever is in posit ion P. If t he ignit ion key is w it hdrawn, t he select or lever is
blocked in posit ion P.
When t he engine is running and t he vehicle is st at ionary, it is necessary t o

hold t he car w it h t he brake pedal in all t he posit ions of t he select or lever (except P and N) since t he pow er t ransmission is never complet ely int errupt ed,
also not w hen t he engine is idling - t he vehicle creeps.
Kickdow n funct ion

The kickdown function provides you wit h maximum accelerat ion
power.
You must on no account unint ent ionally operat e t he t hrot t le (e.g. by hand
from t he engine compart ment ) if a drive posit ion is engaged w hen t he car is
st at ionary. The vehicle would ot herw ise immediat ely st art off - also w hen t he
handbrake is f irmly applied - risk of an accident !
You must move t he select or lever int o posit ion P and f irmly apply t he
handbrake f irst bef ore you or any ot her person opens t he bonnet and st art s
w orking on t he engine w hen it is running - risk of accident ! It is also essent ial
t o observe all w arnings p age 190 , Working in t he engine compart ment .

Aut omat ic select or lever lock
Wit h t he ignit ion on, t he select or lever is locked when it is in t he posit ions P and
N. You must first of all depress t he brake pedal in order t o move t he select or lever
out of t his posit ion. The warning light page 27 light s up in t he inst rument
clust er as a reminder for t he driver when t he select or lever is in t he posit ions P
and N.
A t ime delay element ensures t hat t he select or lever is not blocked when rapidly
switching over t he posit ion N (e.g. from R t o D). This does, for example, allow one
t o seesaw out a st uck vehicle. The select or lever lock w ill click int o place if t he lever is in t he N posit ion for more t han 2 seconds wit hout t he brake pedal being
pressed.
The select or lever lock is only act ive if t he vehicle is st at ionary or moving at speed
of less t han 5 km/ hour. The lock is sw it ched off aut omat ically int o posit ion N
w hen t he car is t ravelling at a higher speed.
Shif t lock but t on
The Shift lock but t on in t he handle of select or lever prevent s cert ain select or lever
posit ions being engaged inadvert ent ly. The select or lever lock is cancelled w hen
you press t he Shift lock but t on.
Fully depressing t he accelerat or pedal allow s t he kickdown funct ion t o be act ivat ed in t he desired driving program. This funct ion has precedence over t he driving
programme and serves for maximum accelerat ion of t he vehicle when exploit ing
t he maximum pow er pot ent ial of t he engine w it hout t aking int o account t he current select or lever posit ion (D, S or Tipt ronic). The gearbox shift s down t o one or
several gears in line with t he driving st at e and t he vehicle accelerat es. The gearbox does not shift up int o t he highest gear unt il t he engine has reached it s maximum revolut ions for t his gear range.
WARNING
Please not e t hat using t he kickdow n f unct ion can result in t he driven w heels
spinning on a smoot h or slippery road surface - risk of skidding!
Dynamic shif t programme

The aut omat ic gearbox of your vehicle is cont rolled elect ronically. Shift ing up and
down t hrough t he gears is performed aut omat ically on t he basis of pre-defined
driving programmes.
Adopt ing a moderat e st yle of driving w ill cause t he gearbox t o select t he most
economical driving programme. Shift ing up int o a higher gear as soon as possible
and shift ing dow n as lat e as possible w ill have a favourable effect on your fuel
consumpt ion.
Adopt ing a sport y st yle of driving w it h rapid movement s of t he accelerat or pedal
combined wit h sharp accelerat ion and frequent changes in speed, exploit ing t he
t op speed of t he car or depressing t he accelerat or pedal (kickdown funct ion), will
cause t he gearbox t o swit ch over t o t his st yle of driving and shift dow n earlier
wit h frequent changes in gears in comparison t o t he moderat e st yle of driving.

Select ing t he most appropriat e driving programme for t he part icular st yle of driving is a cont inuous process. Irrespect ive of t his it is, how ever, possible t o sw it ch or
shift dow n int o a dynamic shift programme by depressing t he accelerat or rapidly.
The gearbox shift s dow n int o a lower gear mat ching t he speed of t he car and t his
allows you t o accelerat e rapidly (e.g. w hen overt aking) w it hout having t o depress
t he accelerat or pedal fully int o t he kickdown range. The original programme will
be react ivat ed t o mat ch your part icular st yle of driving once t he gearbox has shift ed up again.
When driving in hilly regions, t he gears are select ed t o mat ch uphill and downhill
sect ions. This avoids the gearbox frequent ly shift ing up and down when negot iat ing an uphill st ret ch. When driving downhill, it is possible t o shift dow n int o t he
Tipt ronic posit ion, in order t o exploit t he engine brake t orque.
115
Shif t ing dow n gears
One-t ouch back of t he select or lever (in t he Tipt ronic posit ion) - .
It is possible t o switch over t o manual bot h w hen t he car is st at ionary and also
w hen driving.
When you accelerat e, t he gearbox shift s up aut omat ically int o t he higher gear just
before t he maximum permissible engine speed is reached.
If you select a low er gear, t he aut omat ic gearbox does not shift dow n unt il t here
is no risk of t he engine overrevving.
When you operat e t he kickdow n feat ure, t he gearbox shift s int o a low er gear in
line w it h t he vehicle speed and engine speed.
Tipt ronic
Emergency programme
The Tiptronic allows t he driver t o also shift gears manually.
An emergency programme exist s in t he event of a fault in t he syst em.
The gearbox operates in a corresponding emergency programme if t here are funct ional fault s in t he gearbox elect ronics. This is indicat ed by all of t he segment s in
t he display light ing up or going out .
A funct ional fault can have t he following effect :
The gearbox only shift s int o cert ain gears.
The reverse gear R cannot be used.
The manual shift programme (Tipt ronic) is sw it ched off in the emergency
mode.
Fig. 107 Select or lever: manual shif t ing/ informat ion display: Manual shift ing of gears
The select or lever posit ion you have engaged is indicat ed in t he informat ion display of t he inst rument clust er t oget her wit h t he engaged gear f ig. 107 - right .
If t he gearbox has sw it ched over t o emergency mode, drive t o t he nearest specialist garage in order t o have t he f ault rect ified.
Sw it ching over t o manual shif t ing

Push t he select or lever t o t he right out of posit ion D. Aft er swit ching over, t he
current engaged gear is indicat ed in t he display.
Shif t ing up gears
One-t ouch forw ard of t he select or lever (in t he Tipt ronic posit ion) f ig. 107 +
- left .
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Technical dat a
116
Select or lever-emergency unlocking
Fig. 108 Select or lever-emergency unlocking
In case of int errupt ion of t he pow er supply (e.g. flat vehicle bat t ery, defect ive
fuse) or defect of t he select or lever lock, t he select or lever can no longer be shift ed from t he posit ion P in t he normal way and t he vehicle can no longer be moved.
The select or lever must be unlocked in case of emergency.
Apply t he handbrake firmly.
Carefully pull up t he front left and right cover.
Pull up rear cover.
Use t he finger t o press t he yellow plast ic part dow nw ards f ig. 108.
Simult aneously press t he shift lock but t on in t he handle of t he select or lever

and shift t he lever int o t he posit ion N (if t he select or lever is shift ed again int o
t he posit ion P, it is once again blocked).
Communicat ion
117
Communicat ion
Mult ifunct ion st eering w heel
Operat e radio and radio navigat ion syst em on t he mult if unct ion st eering w heel
You can of course operat e t he radio and radio navigat ion syst em at t he appliance.
You will find a descript ion in t he relevant Ow ner's manual.
If t he side light s are swit ched on, t he but t ons on t he mult ifunct ion st eering w heel
are illuminat ed.
The but t ons apply for t he respect ive operat ing mode of t he current radio or radio
navigat ion syst em.
By pressing or t urning t he but t ons, you can carry out t he following funct ions.
Fig. 109 Mult if unct ion st eering wheel:
cont rol but t ons
The but t ons for set t ing t he basic funct ions of t he fact ory-fit t ed radio and radio
navigat ion syst em are locat ed on t he mult ifunct ion st eering w heel f ig. 109.
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Technical dat a
118
a)
Communicat ion
But t on
Act ion
press briefly
press but t on for a

long period of t ime
Radio, t raf f ic inf ormat ion
CD/ CD changer/ MP3
Navigat ion
Sw it ch off/ on t one/ act ivat ion and deact ivat ion of t he voice cont rol a)
swit ch off/ on
wit hout funct ion
t urn upw ards
Increase volume
t urn downw ards
Decrease volume
press briefly
Changing t o t he next st ored radio st at ion

Changing t o t he next st ored t raffic informat ion
Int errupt ing t he t raffic report
Changing t o t he next t it le
press butt on for a

long t ime
Int errupt ion of t he traffic report
Fast forward
press briefly
Changing t o t he previously st ored radio st at ion

Changing t o t he previously st ored t raffic informat ion
Int errupt ing t he t raffic report
Changing t o t he previous t it le
press butt on for a

long t ime
Fast rewind
press briefly
press briefly
Changing t he audio source
press briefly
t urn upwards
Display of t he st ored/ accessible st at ions

scroll upw ards
Changing t o t he previous t it le
t urn downwards
Display of t he st ored/ accessible st at ions

scroll dow nwards
Changing t o t he next t it le
Call up t he main menu

w it hout funct ion
wit hout funct ion
Valid for the radio navigat ion syst em Columbus.
KOSA permit s t he operat ion of mobile phones and t wo-way radio syst ems w it h a
professionally inst alled ext ernal aerial and a maximum t ransmission pow er of up
t o 10 w at t s.
Not e
The loudspeakers in t he vehicle are mat ched t o a pow er out put of t he radio
and radio navigat ion syst em of 4x 20 W.
For t he equipment sound syst em, t he loudspeakers are mat ched t o a pow er
out put of t he amplifier of 4x40W + 6x20 W.
Mobile phones and t wo-w ay radio syst ems

The inst allat ion of a mobile phone and t w o-w ay radio syst em in a vehicle should
be carried out by a specialist garage.
It is essent ial t hat you inform a specialist garage about t he possibilit es t o assemble and operat e mobile phones and t wo-w ay radio set s which have a power out put of more t han 10 W. The garage will inform you which t echnical possibilit ies exist for ret rofit t ing mobile phones.
When using a mobile phone inside t he vehicle, which is not inserted int o t he
phone adapt er, and t hus has no connect ion t o t he ext ernal aerial, t he elect romagnet ic radiat ion can exceed t he current limit value. If a suit able adapt er is available
Communicat ion
for your mobile phone, use your mobile phone exclusively in t he adapt er so t hat
t he radiat ion in t he vehicle drops t o a minimum. This also improves t he qualit y of
t he connect ion.
To ensure an opt imum signal t ransmission, alw ays leave t he t elephone wit h t he
adapt er in t he t elephone mount .
Furt hermore t he volume can be changed individually during t he call at any t ime
w it h t he but t on for set t ing t he radio or radio navigat ion syst em or wit h t he but t ons on t he mult ifunct ion st eering w heel.
Operat ion of mobile phones or t wo-way radio syst ems may int erfere w it h funct ioning of t he elect ronic syst ems of your vehicle. The reasons for t his may be:
no ext ernal aerial,

ext ernal aerial incorrect ly inst alled,
t ransmission power great er t han 10 watt s.
WARNING
Pay at t ent ion primarily t o t he t raf f ic sit uat ion! As t he driver you are f ully responsible f or road saf et y. Use t he t elephone syst em only t o such an ext ent
t hat you are in f ull cont rol of your vehicle at any t ime.
WARNING
If a mobile phone or a t w o-w ay radio syst em is operat ed in t he vehicle
w it hout using an ext ernal aerial or an ext ernal aerial w hich has been incorrect ly inst alled, t his can increase t he st rengt h of t he elect romagnet ic f ield in
t he int erior of t he vehicle.
Not e
Please refer t o t he following guidelines p age 118, Mobile phones and t wow ay radio syst ems.
Should you have any quest ions, please cont act an aut horised KODA Service
Part ner.
Please concent rat e fully at all t imes on your driving!
You must not inst all t w o-w ay radio syst ems, mobile phones or mount s on
t he covers of t he airbags or w it hin t he immediat e deployment range of airbags. This might result in injuries t o t he occupant s in t he event of an accident .
A phone phonebook is part of t he mobile phone preinst allat ion w it h voice cont rol.
In t he phone phonebook t here are 2,500 free memory locat ions available. Each
cont act can cont ain up t o 4 t elephone numbers. This phone phonebook can be
used in line w it h t he mobile t elephone.
Not e
Observe t he count ry-specific regulat ions for t he use of mobile phones in vehicles.
Universal t elephone preinst allat ion GSM II

Int roduct ion
The universal t elephone preinst allat ion GSM II has a built -in speakerphone. It
provides convenient operat ion by voice, via t he mult ifunct ion st eering w heel or
radio-navigat ion syst em.
All communicat ion bet w een a t elephone and t he hands-free syst em of your vehicle can only be est ablished w it h t he help of t he Bluet oot h t echnology. The
adapt er serves only for charging t he t elephone and for t ransmit t ing t he signal t o
t he ext ernal aerial of t he vehicle.
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Phone Phonebook
Never leave a mobile phone on a seat , on t he dash panel or in anot her

area, f rom w hich it can be t hrow n during a sudden braking manoeuvre, an accident or a collision. In t his case, t he occupant s of t he vehicle might be injured.
Using t he syst em
119
On vehicles fit t ed wit h t he radio navigat ion syst em Columbus, a maximum of 1200
t elephone cont act s are shown in t he display of t his appliance.
Aft er t he first connect ion of t he t elephone, t he syst em begins t o load t he phone
book from t he phone and t he SIM card int o t he memory of t he cont rol unit .
Each t ime t he t elephone has est ablished a new connect ion wit h t he hands-free
syst em, an updat e of t he relevant phone book is performed. The updat ing can
t ake a few minut es. During t his t ime t he phone book, w hich was st ored aft er t he
last updat e w as complet ed, is available. New ly st ored t elephone numbers are only
shown aft er t he updat ing has ended.
If t he number of cont act s loaded exceeds 2 500, t he phone book is not complet e.
If a t elephone event (e.g. incoming or outgoing call, dialogue of t he voice cont rol)
occurs during t he updat ing procedure, t he updat ing is int errupt ed. Aft er t he t elephone event has ended, t he updat ing st art s anew .
Technical dat a
120
Communicat ion
Connect ion of t he mobile phone w it h t he hands-free syst em

In order t o connect a mobile phone w it h t he hands-free syst em, it is necessary t o
connect t he t elephone t o t he hands-free syst em. Det ailed informat ion on t his is
provided in t he operat ing inst ruct ions of your mobile phone. The following st eps
must be carried out for t he connect ion:
Act ivat e Bluet oot h in your t elephone and t he visibilit y of t he mobile phone.
Select t he menu Phone - Phone search in the informat ion display and wait unt il t he cont rol unit has ended t he search.
Select your mobile phone in t he menu of t he unit s found.
Confirm t he PIN (as st andard 1234).
If t he hands-free syst em announces (as st andard Skoda UHV) on t he display of

t he mobile phone, ent er t he PIN (as st andard 1234) wit hin 30 seconds and wait
unt il t he connect ion is est ablished.1)
Aft er ending t he connect ion, confirm in t he informat ion display t hat a new
user profile was creat ed.
If no more free space is available for creat ing a new user profile, delet e an exist ing
user profile.
If you have not managed t o connect your mobile phone w it h t he hands-free syst em w it hin 3 minut es aft er swit ching on t he ignit ion, sw it ch t he ignit ion off and
t hen again on. The visibilit y of t he hands-free syst em is est ablished again for 3
minut es. The visibilit y of t he Bluet oot h device is aut omat ically switched off if t he
vehicle st art s off or if t he mobile phone connect s t o t he device.
During t he connect ing procedure, no ot her mobile phone may be connect ed w it h
t he hands-free syst em.
Up to four mobile phones can be paired t o t he hands-free syst em, whereby only
one mobile phone can communicat e wit h t he hands-free syst em.
1)
Some mobile phones have a menu, in which the authorizat ion for est ablishing a Bluetoot h connect ion is performed via t he input of a code. If the input for t he aut horizat ion is necessary, it must always be performed w hen re-est ablishing the Bluet ooth connect ion.
Connect ion w it h an already paired mobile phone

Aft er swit ching on t he ignit ion, t he connect ion is aut omat ically est ablished for t he
already paired mobile phone 1). Check on t he mobile unit if t he aut omat ic connect ion w as est ablished.
Disconnect ing t he connect ion
By wit hdraw ing t he ignit ion key.

By disconnect ing t he device in t he informat ion display.
By disconnect ing t he mobile phone.
Solving connect ion problems

If t he syst em announces No paired phone f ound, check t he operat ing st at e of t he
t elephone:
Is t he t elephone swit ched on?
Is t he PIN code ent ered?
Is Bluet oot h act ive?
Is t he visibilit y of t he mobile phone act ive?
Was t he t elephone already paired wit h t he hands-free syst em?
WARNING
In t he event of air t ransport , t he Bluet oot h f unct ion of t he hands-f ree syst em must be sw it ched of f by a specialist garage!
Not e
Not valid for all mobile phones w hich enable a communicat ion via Bluet oot h .
You can ask at an aut horised KODA Service Part ner if your t elephone is compat ible wit h t he universal telephone preinst allat ion GSM II.
If a suit able adapt er is available for your mobile phone, use your mobile phone
exclusively in t he adapt er so t hat t he radiat ion in t he vehicle drops t o a minimum.
Communicat ion
Insert ing t he mobile phone int o t he adapt er ensures an opt imal sending and
receiving power and offers at t he same t ime t he advant age of t he bat t ery charging.
The range of t he Bluet oot h connect ion t o t he hands-free syst em is rest rict ed
t o t he vehicle int erior. The range is dependent on local fact ors, e.g. obst acles bet ween t he devices and mut ual int erferences wit h ot her devices. If your mobile
phone is e.g. in a jacket pocket , t his can lead t o difficult ies w hen est ablishing t he
Bluet oot h connect ion wit h t he hands-free syst em or t he dat a t ransfer.
121
CAUTION
Taking t he mobile phone out of t he adapt er during t he call can lead t o int errupt ion of t he connect ion. When t aking out the mobile phone, t he connect ion t o t he
fact ory-fit t ed ant enna is int errupt ed; t his reduces t he qualit y of t he t ransmit t ing
and receiving signal. The charging of t he mobile phone bat t ery is also int errupt ed.
Operat ing t elephone calls w it h t he aid of t he adapt er.
Insert ing t he mobile phone and adapt er
Fig. 111 Illust rat ion image: Adapt er w it h one but t on/ adapt er w it h t w o but t ons
Fig. 110 Universal preparat ion f or t he
mobile phone
Funct ion overview of t he
(PTT - push t o t alk) but t on on t he adapt er f ig. 111:
Act ivat ing/ deact ivat ing voice cont rol

Reject / end a call
Only one t elephone mount is fact ory-fit t ed. An adapt er for t he t elephone can be
purchased from t he range of t he KODA Original Accessories.
Insert ing t he mobile phone and adapt er
On some adapt ers, aside from t he but t on, t he SOS f ig. 111 but t on also appears- on t he right . Aft er pressing t he but t on for 2 seconds, t he number 112
(Emergency call) is dialled.
First of all push t he adapt er A in t he direct ion of arrow f ig. 110 up t o t he

st op int o t he mount . Press t he adapt er slight ly downw ards, unt il it locks securely int o posit ion.
Insert t he mobile phone int o t he adapt er A (as specified in manufact urer's inst ruct ions).
Removing t he mobile phone and adapt er

Press simult aneously t he side locks of t he mount f ig. 110 and remove t he
mobile phone and adapt er .
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Not e
The adapt ers illust rat ed are only prime examples.
On vehicles fit t ed w it h t he radio navigat ion syst em Columbus, t he

but t ons do not operat e.
and SOS
Technical dat a
122
Communicat ion
Operat ion of t he t elephone on t he mult ifunct ion st eering w heel

This applies only if your vehicle has been equipped w it h t he t elephone preinst allat ion at t he fact ory.
If t he side light s are swit ched on, t he but t ons on t he mult ifunct ion st eering wheel
are illuminat ed.
Overview of t he different funct ions in cont rast t o t he mult ifunct ion st eering
wheel wit hout mobile phone operat ion page 117.
Fig. 112 Mult ifunct ion st eering wheel:
Mobile phone operat ion
The driver can set t he basic funct ions of t he t elephone by simply operat ing t he
but t ons locat ed on t he st eering wheel so t hat he can concent rat e on t he t raffic
sit uat ion w it hout being dist ract ed as lit t le as possible by operat ing t he t elephone
f ig. 112.
But t on
Act ion
Operat ion
press briefly
Act ivat ion and deact ivat ion of t he voice cont rol (But t on PTT - Push t o t alk)
Cancellat ion of t he played message
t urn upw ards
Increase volume
t urn dow nw ards
Decrease volume
press briefly
Accept call, end call, ent ry in t he main menu of t he t elephone, list of t he dialled t elephone numbers, call t he dialled cont act
press but t on for a long

t ime
Reject call, privat e call
press briefly
Reach one level higher in t he menu (according t o t he current position in t he menu)
press but t on for a long

t ime
Leave t he phone menu
press briefly
Select ion of menu point
press but t on for a long period of t ime
To t he next init ial let t er in t he t elephone book
t urn upwards
The last chosen menu select ion, name
t urn downwards
The next menu select ion, name
quickly t urn upwards
To t he previous init ial let t er in t he t elephone book
quickly t urn dow nw ards
To t he next init ial let t er in t he t elephone book
Communicat ion
The but t ons operat e t he funct ions for t he operat ing mode of t he current t elephone.
Operat e t he t elephone via t he informat ion display
Bluet oot h
In t he menu Bluet oot h you can select t he following menu point s:
In t he menu Phone you can select t he following menu point s:

Phone book
Dial number 1)
Call regist er
Voice mailbox
Bluet oot h 1)
Set t ings2)
Back
Phone book
In t he menu point Phone book is t he list of t he loaded cont act s from t he t elephone memory and t he SIM card of t he mobile phone.
Dial number
In t he menu point Dial number, you can w rit e any t elephone number. Select in sequence t he desired digit s w it h t he aid of t he handwheel and confirm it by pressing
t he handwheel. You can choose t he numbers 0 - 9, symbols , , # and t he funct ions Cancel, Call, Delet e.
Call regist er
User - t he overview of t he st ored users

New user - Search for new t elephones w hich are in t he recept ion range
Visibilit y - Swit ching on t he visibilit y of t he t elephone unit for ot her devices
Media player
Act ive device
Paired devices
Search
Phone name - t he possibilit y t o change t he name of t he t elephone unit (preset SKODA UHV)
Set t ings
In t he menu Set t ings you can select t he following menu points:
Phone book
Updat e 1)
List
Surname
First name
Ring t one
Back
Ret urn in t he basic menu of t he t elephone.
In t he menu point Call regist er, you can select t he follow ing menu point s:
Missed calls
Dialled numbers
Received calls
Voice mailbox
In t he menu Voice mailbox, it is possible t o set t he number of t he voice mailbox 1)
and t hen dial t he number.
1)
On vehicles fitt ed wit h the radio navigat ion system Amundsen+, t his funct ion can be accessed via
t he menu of t he radio navigat ion system; see t he operat ing inst ruct ions for t he Amundsen+.
2)
This function is not available in vehicles fit t ed w it h t he radio navigat ion syst em Amundsen+.
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
123
Technical dat a
124
Communicat ion
Voice cont rol

Dialogue
On vehicles which are fact ory-fit t ed wit h t he navigat ion syst em Columbus, it is only possible t o operate t he voice cont rol via t his navigat ion system, see the operat ing inst ruct ions for Columbus.
The period, in which t he t elephone syst em is ready t o receive voice commands
and carry out t he voice commands, is called DIALOGUE. The syst em gives audible
feedback and guides you if necessary t hrough t he relevant funct ions.
Opt imum underst anding of t he voice commands depends on t he f ollow ing
f act ors:
Speak at a normal volume, w it hout int onat ion and excessive voice pauses.
Avoid insufficient art iculat ion.
Close t he doors, w indows and sliding roof, in order t o reduce or st op dist urbing
ext erior noise.
It is recommended t o speak louder at higher speeds, so t hat t he t one of your
voice is louder t han t he increased surrounding noise.
During t he dialogue avoid addit ional noise in t he vehicle, e.g. simult aneously
t alking occupant s.
Do not speak, if t he syst em makes an announcement .
The microphone for voice cont rol is insert ed in t he moulded headliner and direct ed t o t he driver and front passenger. Therefore t he driver and t he front passenger can operat e t he equipment .
If a voice command is not det ect ed, t he syst em answers wit h Sorry? and a new
ent ry can be performed. Aft er t he 2nd error t he syst em repeat s t he aid. Aft er t he
3rd error t he answ er Procedure cancelled is given and t he dialogue is ended.
Sw it ch on voice cont rol (dialogue)
by briefly pressing t he but t on on t he adapt er1) f ig. 111;
by pressing t he 1 but t on on t he mult i-funct ion st eering wheel for a longer
t ime f ig. 112.
Sw it ching of f voice cont rol (dialogue)

If t he syst em is current ly playing a message, you w ill need t o st op t he message
current ly being played:
by briefly pressing t he but t on on t he adapt er 1);
by pressing t he 1 but t on on t he mult i-funct ion st eering w heel for a longer
t ime.
If t he syst em expect s a voice command, you can end t he dialogue yourself:
Do some w it h t he CANCEL voice command;
by pressing t he but t on on t he adapt er1);
by pressing t he 1 but t on on t he mult i-funct ion st eering w heel for a longer
t ime.
Not e
The dialogue of an incoming call is immediat ely int errupt ed.
The voice cont rol is only possible in vehicles fit t ed w it h a multi-funct ion st eering w heel wit h t elephone cont rol or a phone holder and adapt er.
Voice commands
Basic voice commands for operat ing t he t elephone cont rol unit
Voice command
Not valid for vehicles w hich are fit t ed w it h t he radio navigat ion syst em Columbus.
Act ion
HELP
Aft er t his command t he syst em repeat s all possible

commands.
CALL XYZ
Wit h t his command you call up t he cont act from t he

phone book page 125.
PHONE BOOK
Aft er t his command, for example t he phone book can

be repeat ed, a voice ent ry for t he cont act can be updat ed or delet ed et c.
CALL HISTORY
List s of dialled numbers, missed calls, et c.
DIAL NUMBER
Aft er t his command a phone number can be ent ered

w hich est ablishes a connect ion t o t he request ed part y.
REDIAL
1)
Aft er t his command t he syst em select s t he last select ed t elephone number.
Communicat ion
Voice command
MUSICa)
FURTHER OPTIONS
SETTINGS
CANCEL
a)
Music playback via Bluet oot h
Act ion
Play music from t he mobile phone or anot her paired
device.
The universal t elephone preinst allat ion GSM IIl makes it possible t o play back music via Bluet oot h from t he devices such as MP3 player, mobile phone or not ebook.
Aft er t his command t he syst em offers addit ional cont ext -dependent commands.
In order t o enable t he music playback via Bluet oot h , it is necessary t o connect

t he t erminal device wit h t he hands-free syst em in t he menu Phone - Bluet oot h Media player.
Select ion for set t ing Bluet oot h , dialogue et c.

The dialogue is ended.
On vehicles fitt ed wit h the radio navigat ion system Amundsen+, t his funct ion can be accessed via
t he menu of t he radio navigat ion syst em; see t he operat ing inst ruct ions for t he Amundsen+.
The operat ion of t he music playback from t he connect ed device can be performed
via t he hands-free syst em w it h t he voice cont rol p age 124, Voice commands or
direct ly via t he connect ed device.
Aft er giving t he command DIAL NUMBER, t he syst em request s t he ent ry of a t elephone number. The t elephone number can be ent ered as an int erconnect ed spoken row of digit s (complet e number), in t he form of order of digit s (separat ion
t hrough a brief voice pause) or t hrough individually spoken digit s. Aft er each order
of digit s (separat ion t hrough brief voice pause) all of t he digit s det ect ed up t o now
are repeat ed by t he syst em.
The digit s 0 - 9, symbols +, , # are permit t ed. The syst em det ect s no cont inuous
digit combinat ions such as t went y-t hree, but only individually spoken digit s (t w o,
t hree).
Not e
The device t o be connect ed must support t he Bluet oot h profile A2DP, see
Ow ner's manual of the device t o be coupled.
Call name
This funct ion is not available in vehicles fit t ed wit h t he car radio Blues.
Mult imedia
Input s AUX-IN and MDI
Swit ch on t he voice operat ion page 124, Voice cont rol.
Give t he command CALL XYZ aft er t he signal t one.
Voice command
Announcement
CALL XYZ
Say home, w ork, mobile
e.g. WORK
XYZ w ork is dialed.
CALL XYZ WORK
XYZ w ork is dialed.
St ore voice recording of a cont act

If aut omat ic name recognit ion does not w ork reliably for some cont act s, you w ill
can choose t o save your ow n voice ent ry for t he cont act in t he menu point Phone
book - Voice Tag - Record.
You can also st ore your ow n voice ent ry using voice cont rol in t he menu FURTHER
OPTIONS.
Saf et y
The input AUX-IN is locat ed below t he armrest of t he front seat s and is marked
w it h .
The input MDI is locat ed in t he front cent re console.
Example for calling t he name f rom t he phone book
Using t he syst em
125
Driving Tips
The input s AUX-IN and MDI are used t o connect ext ernal audio sources (e.g. iPod
or MP3 player) and play back music from t hese devices via your fact ory-fit t ed radio
or radio navigat ion syst em.
The descript ion of t he operat ion can be found in t he relevant Owner's Manual of
your radio or your radio navigat ion syst em.
Not e
The loudspeakers in t he vehicle are mat ched t o a pow er out put of t he radio
and radio navigat ion syst em of 4x 20 W.
For t he equipment sound syst em, t he loudspeakers are mat ched t o a pow er
out put of t he amplifier of 4x40W + 6x20 W.
Technical dat a
126
Communicat ion
CD change
Not e
Always guide t he CD int o t he CD-case B wit h t he print ed side point ing upwards.
Never push t he CD wit h force int o t he CD-case as t he insert ion is performed
aut omat ically.
Aft er loading a CD int o t he CD-changer, you must wait unt il t he LED of t he corresponding but t on D light s up. Then t he CD-case B is free t o load t he next CD.
If you have select ed a posit ion, on which a CD is already locat ed, t his CD w ill be
eject ed. Take out t he eject ed CD and load t he desired CD.

Fig. 113 The CD changer
DVD-preinst allat ion
The CD changer for t he radio and radio navigat ion syst em is housed on t he left hand side of t he luggage compart ment .
Insert a CD
Touch t he but t on A f ig. 113 and guide t he CD (compact disc) int o t he CDcase B . The CD is aut omat ically loaded onto t he low est free posit ion in t he CD
changer. The LED in t he corresponding but ton D st ops flashing.
Fill CD changer w it h CDs

Hold t he but t on A pressed and guide t he CDs one aft er t he ot her (maximum
6 CDs) int o t he CD case B . The LEDs in t he but t ons D are no longer flashing.
Insert ing a CD t o one definit e posit ion
Press on t he but t on A . The LEDs in t he but t ons D light up at t he memory
spaces, which are already assigned and flash in t he case of free memory
spaces.
Touch t he but t on D and insert t he CD int o t he CD slot B .
Eject ing a CD
Briefly press on t he but t on C , in order t o eject a CD. For assigned memory
spaces, now t he LEDs light up in t he but t ons D .
Touch t he corresponding but t on D . The CD is eject ed.
Eject ing all CDs

Hold t he but t on C pressed for more t han 2 seconds, in order t o eject t he CDs.
All CDs in t he CD-changer are eject ed consecut ively.
Fig. 114 Seat backrest - lef t front seat / right front seat
Descript ion
A
B
C
Openings for at t achment of DVD player holder

Audio/ video input
Connect ion input , DVD player
Only one DVD pre-inst allat ion is fact ory-inst alled in t he seat backrest of t he front
seat .
The DVD player holder and DVD player can be purchased from t he range of t he
KODA Original Accessories. For a descript ion of t he cont rols, refer t o t he operat
ing inst ruct ions for t hese devices and equipment .
Communicat ion
WARNING
If t here are passengers of bot h of t he rear seat s, t he DVD player holder
must not be used alone (w it hout t he DVD player) - risk of injury!
The inclinat ion of t he holder can be adjust ed t o t hree preset posit ions.
Risk of f inger injuries bet w een t he holder and t he backrest in case of changes
in t he posit ion of t he DVD player holder.
Do not use t he DVD player holder w hen t he rear seat backrest or t he rear
seat is f olded forw ard or has been removed complet ely.
Not e
Follow t he inst ruct ions given in t he operat ing inst ruct ions of t he DVD player/ DVD
player holder.
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Technical dat a
127
128
Passive Safet y
Safet y
Passive Safet y
Basic informat ion
Driving t he saf e w ay
Passive safet y measures reduce t he risk of injury in accident situat ions.
In t his sect ion you w ill find import ant informat ion, t ips and not es on t he subject of
passive safet y in your vehicle. We have combined everyt hing here which you
should be familiar wit h, for example, regarding seat belt s, airbags, child seat s and
safet y of children. Therefore, please follow especially t he not es and w arnings in
t his sect ion in your ow n int erest and in t he int erest of your passengers.
The specified safet y equipment works t oget her, in order t o opt imally prot ect you
and t hose t ravelling wit h you in accident sit uat ions. The safet y equipment does
not prot ect you or t he people t ravelling wit h you, if you or your occupant s adopt
an incorrect seat ed posit ion or t he equipment is not correct ly adjust ed or used.
WARNING
This chapt er cont ains import ant inf ormat ion on how t o use t he vehicle f or
t he driver and his occupant s. You w ill f ind furt her inf ormat ion on saf et y, w hich
concerns you and t hose t ravelling w it h you, in t he f ollow ing chapt ers of t his
Owner's Manual.
The complet e on-board lit erat ure should alw ays be in t he vehicle. This applies in part icular, if you rent out or sell t he vehicle.
Saf et y equipment
The safety equipment is part of t he occupant prot ect ion and it can
reduce t he risk of injuries in accident sit uat ions.
Do not put at risk your safet y and t he safet y of t hose t ravelling wit h you . In t he
event of an accident , t he safet y equipment can reduce t he risk of injuries.
The follow ing list cont ains part of t he safet y equipment in your vehicle:
Three-point seat belt s for all t he seat s,

belt force limit er for front seat s,
belt t ensioner for front seat s,
seat belt height adjust er for front seat s,

front airbag for t he driver and front passenger,
driver's knee airbag,
front side airbags,
rear side airbags,
head airbags;
anchoring point s for child seat using t he ISOFIX syst em,
anchoring point s for child seat using t he Top Tet her syst em,
head rest raint adjust able for height ,
adjust able st eering column.
For t his reason you will be provided w it h informat ion on why t hese equipment
component s are very import ant , how it prot ect s you and t he occupant s, w hat
should be observed when using t he equipment and how you and t he people t ravelling wit h you can make full use of t he exist ing safet y equipment. This Ow ner's
Manual cont ains important warning not es, which you and t hose t ravelling w it h
you should pay at t ent ion t o in order t o reduce a risk of injury.
Saf et y concerns everybody!
Before set t ing of f

The driver is always fully responsible for his occupant s and for t he
operat ing safet y of t he vehicle.
For your own safet y and t he safet y of t he people t ravelling wit h you, please pay
at t ent ion t o t he following point s before set t ing off:
Ensure t hat t he light ing and t he t urn signal syst ems are funct ioning properly.
Inspect t he t yre inflat ion pressure.
Ensure t hat all t he window s offer a good visibilit y t o t he out side.
Passive Safet y
Safely at t ach t he it ems of luggage p age 70, Loading t he luggage compart ment .
Ensure t hat no object s can obst ruct t he pedal.
Adjust t he mirror, t he front seat and t he head rest raint t o mat ch your body
size.
Point out t o your occupant s t hat t he head rest raint s must be adjust ed t o
mat ch t heir body size.
Prot ect t he children in suit able child seat s w it h correct ly fastened seat belt s
p age 146, Transport ing children safely.
Adopt t he correct seat ed posit ion page 129, Correct seat ed posit ion. Also
inform your occupant s t o adopt t he correct seat ed posit ion.
Fast en t he seat belt correct ly. Also inform your occupant s t o properly fast en
t he seat belt s page 134, How are seat belt s correct ly fast ened?.
129
Correct seat ed posit ion

Correct seat ed posit ion for t he driver
Correct seat ed posit ion for t he driver is import ant for safe and relaxed driving.
What inf luences t he driving saf et y?

The driving safety is primarily det ermined by t he st yle of driving
and the personal behaviour of all t he occupant s.
The driver is fully responsible for himself and his occupant s. If your driving safet y
is effect ed, you place yourself and t he oncoming t raffic at risk. Please refer t o t he
following guidelines.
Do not get dist ract ed from concent rat ing on t he t raffic sit uat ion, e.g. by your
occupant s or mobile phone calls.
Never drive w hen your driving abilit y is impaired, e.g. t hrough medicat ion, alcohol, drugs.
Keep t o t he t raffic regulat ions and t he permissible speed limit .
Adjust t he driving speed at all t imes t o the road condit ion as well as t o t he
t raffic and w eat her condit ions.
Take regular breaks on long journeys - at t he lat est every t wo hours.
Fig. 115 The correct dist ance of t he driver f rom t he st eering w heel and t he gear lever/ The
correct head rest raint adjust ment f or t he driver
For your ow n safet y and t o reduce t he risk of injury in t he event of an accident , we

recommend t he following set t ing.
Posit ion t he st eering w heel so t hat t here is a gap of at least 25 cm bet ween
t he st eering wheel and t he chest , and t he dist ance bet ween t he legs and t he gear
lever at t he height of t he knee airbag is at least 10 cm f ig. 115 - left .
Posit ion t he driver seat in t he forw ard/ back direct ion so t hat you are able t o
press t he pedals wit h your legs at a slight angle, and t he dist ance bet ween t he
knee and t he gear lever is at least 10 cm.
Adjust t he seat backrest so t hat you are able t o reach t he highest point of t he
st eering w heel w it h your arms at a slight angle.
Adjust t he head rest raint so t hat t he t op edge of t he head rest raint is at t he
same level as t he upper part of your head f ig. 115 - right .
Fast en t he seat belt correct ly page 134, How are seat belt s correct ly fast ened?.
Manual driver seat adjust ment p age 61, Adjust ing t he front seat s.
Elect rical driver seat adjust ment p age 63, Adjust ing front seat s elect rically.
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
Technical dat a
130
Passive Safet y
Manual front passenger adjust ment page 61.
WARNING
Elect rical front passenger seat adjust ment p age 63, Adjust ing front seat s elect rically.
The front seat s and t he head rest raint s must alw ays be adjust ed t o mat ch
correct ly fast ened in order t o provide an opt imal prot ect ion f or you and your
occupant s.
WARNING
The f ront seat s and t he head rest raint s must alw ays be adjust ed t o mat ch
correct ly f ast ened in order t o provide an opt imal prot ect ion for you and your
occupant s.
The driver must maint ain a dist ance of at least 25 cm bet w een t he st eering
w heel, and a dist ance of at least 10 cm bet w een t he legs and t he gear lever at
t he height of t he knee airbag f ig. 115 - lef t . Not maint aining t his minimum
dist ance w ill mean t hat t he airbag syst em w ill not be able t o properly prot ect
you - hazard!
The f ront passenger must maint ain a dist ance of at least 25 cm t o t he dash
panel. Not maint aining t his minimum dist ance w ill mean t hat t he airbag syst em w ill not be able t o properly prot ect you - hazard!
When driving, hold t he st eering w heel w it h bot h hands f irmly on t he out er

edge in t he 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock posit ion. Never hold t he st eering w heel
firmly in t he 12 o'clock posit ion or in anot her w ay (e.g. in t he middle of t he
st eering w heel or at t he inner st eering w heel edge). In such cases, injuries t o
t he arms, t he hands and t he head can occur w hen t he driver airbag is deployed.
Alw ays keep your f eet in t he foot w ell when t he car is being driven - never
place your feet on t he inst rument panel, out of t he w indow or on t he surf aces
of t he seat s. You w ill be exposed t o increased risk of injury if it becomes necessary t o apply t he brake or in t he event of an accident . If an airbag is deployed, you may suf f er f at al injuries w hen adopt ing an incorrect seat ed posit ion!
Ensure t hat t here are no object s in t he foot w ell as any object s may get behind t he pedals during a driving or braking manoeuvre. You w ould t hen no
longer be able t o operat e t he clut ch, t o brake or accelerat e.
Correct seat ed posit ion for t he f ront passenger

The front passenger must maint ain a dist ance of at least 25 cm
from t he dash panel so t hat t he airbag offers him t he great est possible safet y it is deployed.
For t he safet y of t he front passenger and t o reduce t he risk of injury in t he event
of an accident , we recommend t he follow ing set t ing.
Adjust t he front passenger seat as far as possible t o t he rear.
Adjust t he head rest raint so t hat t he t op edge of t he head rest raint is at t he
same level as t he upper part of your head f ig. 115 - right .
In except ional cases t he front passenger airbag can be deact ivat ed p age 144,
Deact ivat ing an airbag.
The seat backrest s must not be angled t oo far back w hen driving ot herwise t his w ill af fect proper operat ion of t he seat belt s and of t he airbag syst em - risk of injury!
Correct seat ed posit ion for t he occupant s on t he rear seat s

Occupant s on t he rear seat s must sit upright , keep t he feet in t he
foot well and must have t heir seat belt s correctly fast ened.
To reduce t he risk of injury in t he event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or an accident , t he occupant s on t he rear seat s must observe t he following:
Adjust t he head rest raint s so t hat t he t op edge of t he head rest raint s is at t he
same level as t he upper part of your head f ig. 115 - on t he right .
If you are t ransport ing page 146, Transport ing children safely children in t he
vehicle, please use a suit able child rest raint syst em.
Passive Safet y
WARNING
The head rest raint s must alw ays be adjust ed t o mat ch t he body size, in order t o of f er an opt imal prot ect ion f or you and your occupant s.
Alw ays keep your feet in t he f oot w ell w hen t he car is being driven - never
put your f eet out of t he w indow or on t he surf aces of t he seat s. You w ill be
exposed t o increased risk of injury if it becomes necessary t o apply t he brake
or in t he event of an accident . If t he head airbag is deployed and w hen adopt ing an incorrect seat ed posit ion, you are exposing yourself t o an increased risk
of injury and in t he event of an accident you may suff er f at al injuries!
If t he occupant s on t he rear seat s are not sit t ing upright , t he risk of injury
is increased due t o incorrect rout ing of t he seat belt .
Examples of an incorrect seat ed posit ion
put t he feet on t he dash panel,

put t he feet on t he seat upholst ery,
occupy t he foot well,
have t he seat belt not fast ened,
occupy t he luggage compart ment .
WARNING
If t he occupant adopt s an incorrect seat ed posit ion, he is exposed t o lif et hreat ening injuries, in case he is hit by a deployed airbag.
Bef ore set t ing of f , please adopt t he correct seat ed posit ion and do not
change t his seat ed posit ion w hile t he car is moving. Also advise your occupant s t o adopt t he correct seat ed posit ion and not t o change t his seat ed posit ion w hile t he car is moving.
An incorrect seat ed posit ion can lead t o severe injuries or deat h for
the occupants.
Seat belt s offer t heir opt imum prot ect ion only if t he webbing of t he seat belt s is
properly rout ed. Incorrect seat ed posit ions considerably reduce the prot ect ive
funct ions of t he seat belt s and t herefore increase t he risk of injury due t o an incorrect rout ing of t he seat belt . The driver is fully responsible for himself and t he
occupant s, in part icular for t he children. Do not permit an occupant t o adopt an
incorrect seat ed posit ion when t he car is moving.
The following list cont ains t he examples of seat ed posit ions w hich are dangerous
for t he occupant s. This list is not complet e, however, w e w ant t o direct your at t ent ion t o t his subject .
Therefore, w hile t he car is moving never:
st and up in t he vehicle,
st and up on t he seat s,
kneel ont o t he seat s,
t ilt t he seat backrest fully t o t he back,
lean against t he dash panel,
lie on t he rear seat s,
only sit on t he front area of t he seat ,
sit t o t he side,
lean out of t he window ,
put t he feet out of t he w indow,
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
131
Technical dat a
132
Seat belt s
Seat belt s
Why seat belt s?
WARNING
Fast en your seat belt each t ime bef ore set t ing of f - also w hen driving in
t ow n! This also applies t o t he people seat ed at t he rear - risk of injury!
Expect ant w omen must also alw ays w ear a seat belt . This is t he only w ay
of ensuring opt imal prot ect ion f or t he unborn child p age 134, How are seat
belt s correct ly fast ened?.
It is import ant for t he belt w ebbing t o be properly rout ed if t he seat belt s
are t o of fer t he maximum prot ect ion. You can see a descript ion of how saf et y
belt s should be f it t ed properly on t he next pages.
Fig. 116 Driver w earing seat belt
Not e
Please comply wit h any differing legal requirement s w hen using the seat belt s.
It is a proven fact t hat seat belt s offer good prot ect ion in accident s f ig. 116. Thus
w earing a seat belt is a legal requirement in most count ries.
Seat belt s which have been correct ly fast ened and adjust ed hold t he occupant s of
t he car in t he correct seat ed posit ion f ig. 116. The seat belt s reduce t he kinet ic
energy (energy of mot ion) t o a considerable ext ent . They also prevent uncont rolled movement s w hich, in t urn, may w ell result in severe injuries.
The physical principle of a front al collision
The occupant s of a vehicle who have fast ened and correct ly adjust ed t heir seat
belt , profit t o a major ext ent from t he fact t hat t he kinet ic energy is opt imally absorbed by t he belt s. The st ruct ure of t he front end of t he vehicle and ot her passive safet y measures, such as t he airbag syst em, also cont ribut e t o reducing t he
kinet ic energy. The energy produced is t hus absorbed and t here is less risk of injury.
Accident st at ist ics prove t hat seat belt s w hich are fast ened and properly adjust ed
reduce t he risk of an injury and enhance t he chance of survival in a major accident
page 132.
It is import ant t hat you pay at t ent ion t o safet y measures, part icularly w hen t ransport ing children in t he vehicle page 146, What you should know about t ransport ing children!.
Fig. 117 The driver is cat apult ed f orw ard if not w earing a belt / The rear seat occupant is cat apult ed forw ard if not wearing a belt
The physical principle of a front al accident can be explained quit e simply:

Mot ion energy, so-called kinet ic energy, is produced as soon as t he vehicle is moving, bot h for t he vehicle and it s occupant s. The magnit ude of t his kinet ic energy
depends essent ially on t he speed at w hich t he vehicle is t ravelling and on t he
weight of t he vehicle including t he occupant s. The great er t he speed and w eight
increase, t he great er t he amount of energy which has t o be absorbed in t he event
of an accident .
Seat belt s
The speed of t he vehicle is, nevert heless, t he most import ant fact or. Doubling t he
speed of t he vehicle from 25 km/ h up t o 50 km/ hour increases t he kinet ic energy
four t imes.
The belt w ebbing must not run across solid or f ragile object s (e.g. spect acles, ball-point pens, keys et c.) as t his may be a cause of injuries.
The common opinion t hat it is possible t o support your body in a minor accident
wit h your hands, is incorrect . Even in a collision at only a low speed, t he forces
act ing on t he body are such t hat it is no longer possible t o support your body.
Many layers of clot hing and loose clot hing (e. g. a w int er coat over a jacket )
do not allow you t o be correct ly seat ed and impairs proper operat ion of t he
seat belt s.
Even if you only drive at a speed w it hin t he range from 30 km/ hour t o 50 km/ hour,
t he forces w hich are produced on your body in t he event of an accident can easily
exceed 10.000 N (Newt on). This equals a weight of one t onne (1 000 kg).
It is prohibit ed t o use clamps or ot her object s t o adjust seat belt s (e. g. f or

short ening t he belt s f or smaller persons).
The lock t ongue should only be insert ed int o t he lock w hich is t he correct
one f or your seat . Wrong use of t he safet y belt w ill reduce it s capacit y t o prot ect and t he risk of injury increases.
In t he event of a front al collision, occupant s of t he vehicle not wearing a seat belt

are t hrown forward and st rike in an uncontrolled w ay part s of t he int erior of t he
vehicle, such as st eering w heel, dash panel, w indshield f ig. 117 - left . The occupant s of a vehicle who have not fast ened t heir seat belt s may even be t hrown out
of t he vehicle. This can result in fat al injuries.
It is also import ant t hat rear seat occupant s fast en t heir seat belt s as t hey w ill
ot herwise be t hrow n through t he vehicle in an uncont rolled manner in t he event
of an accident A rear seat passenger who has not fast ened t he seat belt is a danger not only t o himself but also for t hose seat ed at t he front f ig. 117 - right .
Import ant safet y informat ion regarding t he use of

seat belt s
The correct use of t he seat belt s considerably reduces t he risk of
injury!
WARNING
The belt w ebbing must not be jammed in-bet w een at any point or t w ist ed,
or chaf e against any sharp edges.
It is import ant t hat t he belt w ebbing is properly rout ed if t he seat belt s are
t o of f er t heir maximum prot ect ion p age 134.
The seat backrest s of t he front seat s must not be t ilt ed t oo f ar t o t he rear

ot herw ise t he seat belt s can lose t heir ef fect iveness.
The belt w ebbing must alw ays be kept clean. Soiled belt w ebbing may impair proper operat ion of t he inert ia reel p age 185, Seat belt s.
The slot of t he belt t ongue must not be blocked by paper or similar object s
ot herw ise t he belt t ongue w ill not lock in place properly.
Inspect t he seat belt s regularly t o ensure t hey are in good condit ion. If you
find seat belt s w hich have damage t o t he belt , t he seat belt connect ions, t o
t he inert ia reel or t o t he lock, t he relevant seat belt must be replaced by a
specialist garage.
The seat belt s must not be removed or changed in any w ay. Do not make
an at t empt t o repair t he seat belt s yourself .
Damaged seat belt s w hich have been subject ed t o st ress in an accident
and w ere t heref ore st ret ched, must be replaced - t his is best done by a specialist garage. The anchorage point s of t he belt s must also be inspect ed. The
anchorage point s for t he belt s should also be checked.
In cert ain count ries it is possible t o use seat belt s w hich dif f er in t erms of
t heir operat ion f rom t he seat belt s w hich are described on t he pages w hich
follow .
No t w o persons (also not children) should ever use a single seat belt t oget her.
The maximum prot ect ion w hich seat belt s can of f er is only achieved if you
are correct ly seat ed p age 129, Correct seat ed posit ion.
Using t he syst em
Saf et y
Driving Tips
133
Technical dat a
134
Seat belt s
How are seat belt s correct ly fast ened?
WARNING
The shoulder part of t he seat belt must never run across your neck but
must run approximat ely over t he middle of t he shoulder and f it snugly against
t he chest . The lap part of t he belt must run across t he hip and must never be
rout ed across t he st omach. It must alw ays fit snugly f ig. 118 on t he right . Adjust t he belt w ebbing as required.
Fast ening t hree-point seat belt s

Fast en your seat belt before start ing!
The lap part of t he belt should be posit ioned as low as possible at t he pelvis of an expect ant mot her in order t o avoid exert ing any pressure on t he low er abdomen f ig. 118 - lef t .
Alw ays ensure t hat t he w ebbing of t he seat belt s is properly rout ed. Seat
belt s w hich are not correct ly adjust ed can t hemselves cause injuries even in
minor accident s.
A seat belt w hich is hanging t oo loose can result in injuries as your body is
moved forw ard by t he kinet ic energy produced in an accident and is t hen suddenly held f irm by t he belt .
Fig. 118 Rout ing of belt webbing f or an expect ant mot her/ rout ing of belt webbing over t he
shoulders and t he lap belt
Correct ly adjust t he front seat and t he head rest raint before fast ening your
seat belt page 65, Head rest raint s.
Slow ly pull t he belt webbing at t he t ongue of t he lock over your chest and pelvis .
Insert t he t ongue of t he lock int o t he seat belt buckle belonging t o t he seat

unt il it is heard t o lock in place.
Pull on t he seat belt t o check t hat it has also reliably engaged in t he lock.
Only insert t he lock t ongue int o t he lock w hich is t he correct one f or your
seat . This w ill af fect t he prot ect ion w hich t he belt of f ers and increase t he risk
of an injury.
Seat belt height adjust er on t he front seat s
Each t hree-point seat belt is equipped w it h an inert ia reel. This inert ia reel offers
you complet e freedom of movement if t he belt is unreeled slow ly. If t he brakes
are applied suddenly, t he inert ia reel will block. The belt s also block w hen t he car
accelerat es, when driving dow nhill and when cornering.
Expect ant mot hers must also wear t he seat belt
Fig. 119 Front seat : Seat belt height adjust er
The seat belt height adjust er makes it possible for you t o adapt t he rout ing of t he
front t hree-point seat belt in t he area of t he shoulder t o mat ch your body size.
Move t he height adjust er in t he desired direct ion up or down f ig. 119.
Then pull firmly on t he belt t o ensure t hat t he seat belt height adjust er has
correct ly locked in place.

Skoda Yeti Owners Manual

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Skoda Yeti Owners Manual

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

SIMPLY CLEVER

Int roduct ion

Int roduct ion

On-board lit erat ure

Table of Cont ent s

Table of Cont ent s

Seat s and St ow age . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Inst rument s and w arning light s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Locking and Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Light s and Visibilit y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Heat ing and air condit ioning syst em . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General Maint enance

St art ing-off and Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Aut omat ic gearbox DSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Basic informat ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Breakdow n assist ance

Table of Cont ent s

Transport ing children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

What you should know about t ransport ing children! .

Int elligent t echnology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Elect ronic st abilit y programme (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Driving and t he environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General Maint enance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Inspect ing and Replenishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wheels and Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Accessories, changes and replacement of part s .

Breakdow n assist ance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuel consumpt ion according t o t he ECE st andards and

Fuses and light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General informat ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Cont ent s

General Maint enance

Breakdow n assist ance

Layout of t his Ow ner's Manual (explanat ions)

Layout of t his Ow ner's Manual (explanat ions)

Chapt ers, t able of cont ent s and subject index

Brief informat ion and inst ruct ions

Direct ion indicat ions

Explanat ion of symbols

For t he sake of t he environment

Layout of t his Ow ner's Manual (explanat ions)

General Maint enance

Breakdow n assist ance

This overview will help you t o quickly familiarise yourself wit h t he

Elect ric ext erior mirror adjust ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuse box (on side of dash panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Breakdow n assist ance

Inst rument s and w arning light s

Inst rument s and w arning light s

Overview of t he inst rument clust er

Fig. 2 Inst rument clust er

Engine revolut ions count er p age 11

But t on for display mode:

Inst rument s and w arning light s

Coolant t emperat ure gauge p age 11

Coolant t emperat ure gauge

Engine revolut ions count er

For t he sake of t he environment

General Maint enance

Breakdow n assist ance

Inst rument s and w arning light s

supply quant it y is indicat ed. This effect is not a fault .

Service reminder indicat or

Count er for dist ance driven